Nortel Networks Switch 2500 Series User Manual

Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System  
Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B)  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nortel Networks software license agreement  
This Software License Agreement ("License Agreement") is between you, the end-user ("Customer") and Nortel  
Networks Corporation and its subsidiaries and affiliates ("Nortel Networks"). PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING  
CAREFULLY. YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE THE  
SOFTWARE. USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.  
If you do not accept these terms and conditions, return the Software, unused and in the original shipping container,  
within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price.  
"Software" is owned or licensed by Nortel Networks, its parent or one of its subsidiaries or affiliates, and is  
copyrighted and licensed, not sold. Software consists of machine-readable instructions, its components, data,  
audio-visual content (such as images, text, recordings or pictures) and related licensed materials including all whole  
or partial copies. Nortel Networks grants you a license to use the Software only in the country where you acquired the  
Software. You obtain no rights other than those granted to you under this License Agreement. You are responsible for  
the selection of the Software and for the installation of, use of, and results obtained from the Software.  
1. Licensed Use of Software. Nortel Networks grants Customer a nonexclusive license to use a copy of the  
Software on only one machine at any one time or to the extent of the activation or authorized usage level,  
whichever is applicable. To the extent Software is furnished for use with designated hardware or Customer  
furnished equipment ("CFE"), Customer is granted a nonexclusive license to use Software only on such  
hardware or CFE, as applicable. Software contains trade secrets and Customer agrees to treat Software as  
confidential information using the same care and discretion Customer uses with its own similar information that it  
does not wish to disclose, publish or disseminate. Customer will ensure that anyone who uses the Software  
does so only in compliance with the terms of this Agreement. Customer shall not a) use, copy, modify, transfer or  
distribute the Software except as expressly authorized; b) reverse assemble, reverse compile, reverse engineer  
or otherwise translate the Software; c) create derivative works or modifications unless expressly authorized; or d)  
sublicense, rent or lease the Software. Licensors of intellectual property to Nortel Networks are beneficiaries of  
this provision. Upon termination or breach of the license by Customer or in the event designated hardware or  
CFE is no longer in use, Customer will promptly return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction.  
Nortel Networks may audit by remote polling or other reasonable means to determine Customer’s Software  
activation or usage levels. If suppliers of third party software included in Software require Nortel Networks to  
include additional or different terms, Customer agrees to abide by such terms provided by Nortel Networks  
with respect to such third party software.  
2. Warranty. Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between Nortel Networks and Customer,  
Software is provided "AS IS" without any warranties (conditions) of any kind. NORTEL NETWORKS DISCLAIMS  
ALL WARRANTIES (CONDITIONS) FOR THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT. Nortel Networks is not obligated  
to provide support of any kind for the Software. Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties,  
and, in such event, the above exclusions may not apply.  
3. Limitation of Remedies. IN NO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: a) DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM; b) LOSS  
OF, OR DAMAGE TO, CUSTOMER’S RECORDS, FILES OR DATA; OR c) DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,  
INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS),  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) ARISING OUT OF YOUR  
USE OF THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS, ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN  
ADVISED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. The foregoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and/or  
supplier of the Software. Such developer and/or supplier is an intended beneficiary of this Section. Some  
jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions and, in such event, they may not apply.  
4. General  
a. If Customer is the United States Government, the following paragraph shall apply: All Nortel Networks  
Software available under this License Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial  
computer software documentation and, in the event Software is licensed for or on behalf of the United States  
Government, the respective rights to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel  
Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U.S. Federal Regulations at 48 C.F.R. Sections  
12.212 (for non-DoD entities) and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202 (for DoD entities).  
b. Customer may terminate the license at any time. Nortel Networks may terminate the license if Customer  
fails to comply with the terms and conditions of this license. In either event, upon termination, Customer  
must either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c. Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from  
Customer’s use of the Software. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all applicable  
export and import laws and regulations.  
d. Neither party may bring an action, regardless of form, more than two years after the cause of the action  
arose.  
e. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between  
Customer and Nortel Networks.  
f. This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software.  
If the Software is acquired in the United States, then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of  
the state of New York.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Contents  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Contents  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Contents  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
9
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Contents  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 11  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Contents  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 13  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 Contents  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
New in this release  
The following sections detail what’s new in Overview — System  
Configuration (NN47215-500) for Release 4.1:  
Features  
Other changes  
Features  
For information about changes that are feature related, see the following  
sections:  
Other changes  
For information about changes that are not feature-related, see the following  
sections:  
Information on the new fields StackInsertionUnitNumber and  
AutoUnitReplacementEnabled are updated for the System tab under  
Configuring the switch using Device Manager chapter. For more  
Changed the screen for License File tab. For more information, see  
Information on the new tabs Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time are  
updated with new procedure and screens. For more information, see  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
16 New in this release  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
Introduction  
This guide provides information about configuring and managing basic  
switching features on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
This guide describes the features of the following Nortel switches.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T-PWR  
The term "Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series" is used in this document to  
describe the features common to the switches mentioned above.  
A switch is referred to by its specific name while describing a feature  
exclusive to the switch.  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series operates in the Standalone Mode  
and Stacking Mode in this product release.  
Before you begin  
This guide is intended for network administrators who have the following  
background:  
basic knowledge of networks, switching, Ethernet bridging, and IP  
routing  
familiarity with networking concepts and terminology  
basic knowledge of network topologies  
Text conventions  
This guide uses the following text conventions:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
18 Introduction  
angle brackets (< >)  
Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the  
description inside the brackets. Do not type the brackets  
when entering the command.  
Example: If the command syntax is  
ping <ip_address>, you enter  
ping 192.32.10.12  
bold body text  
Indicates objects such as window names, dialog box  
names, and icons, as well as user interface objects such  
as buttons, tabs, and menu items.  
braces ({})  
Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where  
there is more than one option. You must choose only  
one of the options. Do not type the braces when  
entering the command.  
Example: If the command syntax is  
show ip {alerts|routes}, you must enter either  
show ip alerts or show ip routes, but not both.  
brackets ([ ])  
Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions. Do  
not type the brackets when entering the command.  
Example: If the command syntax is  
show ip interfaces [-alerts], you can enter  
either show ip interfaces or  
show ip interfaces -alerts.  
italic text  
Indicates variables in command syntax descriptions.  
Also indicates new terms and book titles. Where a  
variable is two or more words, the words are connected  
by an underscore.  
Example: If the command syntax is  
show at <valid_route>,  
valid_route is one variable and you substitute one  
value for it.  
plain Courier  
text  
Indicates command syntax and system output, for  
example, prompts and system messages.  
Example: Set Trap Monitor Filters  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related publications 19  
separator ( > )  
vertical line ( | )  
Shows menu paths.  
Example: Protocols > IP identifies the IP command on  
the Protocols menu.  
Separates choices for command keywords and  
arguments. Enter only one of the choices. Do not type  
the vertical line when entering the command.  
Example: If the command syntax is  
show ip {alerts|routes}, you enter either  
show ip alerts or show ip routes, but not both.  
Related publications  
For more information about using the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500, see  
the following publications:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Release NotesNortel  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Release Notes — Software  
Release 4.0 (NN47215-400)  
Documents important changes about the software and hardware that  
are not covered in other related publications.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration — VLANs,  
Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking (NN47215-501)  
Describes how to configure Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN),  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), and MultiLink Trunk (MLT) features for  
the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration — Quality  
of Service (NN47215-504)  
Describes how to configure and manage Quality of Service and IP  
Filtering features for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security — Configuration  
and Management (NN47215-505)  
Describes how to configure and manage security for the Nortel Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management  
— System Monitoring (NN47215-502)  
Describes how to configure system logging and network monitoring,  
and how to display system statistics for the Nortel Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Configuration — IP  
Multicast (NN47215-503)  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
20 Introduction  
Describes how to configure IP Multicast Routing Protocol features for  
the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500.  
How to get help  
This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.  
Getting help from the Nortel web site  
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel  
Technical Support web site:  
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and  
tools to address issues with Nortel products. More specifically, the site  
enables you to:  
download software, documentation, and product bulletins  
search the Technical Support web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base  
for answers to technical issues  
sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation  
for Nortel equipment  
open and manage technical support cases  
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller  
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor  
or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor  
or reseller.  
Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center  
If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support  
web site, and have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the  
phone from a Nortel Solutions Center.  
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).  
Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the phone  
number for your region:  
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code  
An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel products and  
services. When you use an ERC, your call is routed to a technical support  
person who specializes in supporting that product or service. To locate the  
ERC for your product or service, go to:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
How to get help 21  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22 Introduction  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
hardware  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series provides wire-speed switching  
for high-performance, low-cost connections to full-duplex, and half-duplex  
10/100/1000 Mb/s Ethernet Local Area Networks (LAN).  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series software release 4.1 supports the  
following devices:  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T-PWR  
This chapter describes the hardware features and components of the  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series devices. It includes information about  
the following topics:  
Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Front panel  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T-PWR providing power and Ethernet  
connections to IP Phones, and data connections to personal computers  
(PC).  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
24 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware  
Figure 1  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T-PWR  
The following graphics display the front panel configuration on the Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2526T, 2526T-PWR, 2550T, and 2550T-PWR. Table 1  
25) describes the components on the front panel.  
Figure 2  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T front panel  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 25  
Figure 3  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T front panel  
Figure 4  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR front panel  
Figure 5  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T-PWR front panel  
Table 1  
Components on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 front panel  
Item Description  
1
2
3
4
5
Console port  
SFP Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) slots  
10/100BaseT RJ-45 connector ports (copper)  
10/100/1000BaseT RJ-45 connector ports (copper)  
PoE ports (on 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR models only)  
Console port  
With the Console port, you can access the Command Line Interface (CLI)  
commands to customize your network. For more information about using  
the CLI, see "CLI Basics" (page 81).  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
26 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware  
The Console port is a DB-9, RS-232-D male serial port connector. You can  
use this connector to connect a management station, console, or terminal to  
the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series by using a straight-through DB-9  
to DB-9 standard serial port cable. You must use a VT100/ANSI-compatible  
terminal (for cursor control and to activate cursor and functions keys) to  
use the Console port.  
The default settings of the Console port are:  
9600 baud with eight data bits  
one stop bit  
no parity as the communications format  
flow control set to disabled  
Gigabit Interface Converter  
Small Form Factor Pluggable Gigabit Interface Converters are  
hot-swappable input and output enhancement components designed for  
use with Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with fiber  
optic networks.  
SFP GBIC Support on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceivers are hot-swappable  
input/output enhancement components designed for use with Nortel  
products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with other Gigabit Ethernet  
ports over various media types.  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series supports the following SFPs:  
1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC)  
1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: MT-RJ)  
1000Base-LX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC)  
CWDM SFPs  
For more information about the SFP GBICs see Installing Gigabit Interface  
Converters, SFPs, and CWDM SFP Gigabit Interface Converters (312865).  
Port connectors  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series uses 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX  
RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connectors.  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series uses autosensing ports  
designed to operate at 10 Mb/s (megabits per second) or at 100 Mb/s,  
depending on the connecting device. These ports support the IEEE 802.3u  
autonegotiation standard, which means that when a port is connected  
to another device that also supports the IEEE 802.3u standard, the two  
devices negotiate the best speed and duplex mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 27  
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX switch ports also support half- and full-duplex  
mode operation.  
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 switch ports can connect to 10 Mb/s or  
100 Mb/s Ethernet segments or nodes.  
ATTENTION  
Use only Category 5 copper Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable connections  
when connecting 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports.  
Auto-MDI/MDI-X  
The 10/100BASE-TX port connectors support auto-MDI/MDI-X.  
Typical MDI-X ports connect over straight-through cables to the Network  
Interface Card (NIC) in a node or server, similar to a conventional Ethernet  
repeater hub. However, with the auto-MDI/MDI-X feature, you can still use  
straight-through cables while connecting to an Ethernet hub or switch.  
The auto-MDI/MDI-X feature is dependent on the autonegotiation feature.  
If autonegotiation is enabled on a port, the auto-MDI/MDI-X feature is  
automatically enabled on the port as well. If autonegotiation is disabled on a  
port, then the port operates as a standard MDI-X port.  
Power over Ethernet on Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR  
and 2550T-PWR  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR provide IEEE  
802.3af-compliant power over the PoE-labeled front-panel RJ-45 ports. The  
switches provide power discovery and power management on each port  
basis. You can use the PoE ports to provide power to network appliances,  
such as IP Phones, wireless access points, and video devices.  
You can enable or disable power to individual ports. For information about  
LED display panel  
Figure 6 "LED display panel" (page 28) shows the LED display panel of the  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series. See Table 2 "Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500 Series LED descriptions" (page 28) for a description of the LEDs.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
28 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware  
Figure 6  
LED display panel  
Table 2  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series LED descriptions  
Label  
Type  
Meaning  
Color  
State  
Up/28 or  
Up/52  
Rear port  
status  
Green  
Fast Flashing  
Link is good and active.  
Slow Flashing This port is disabled by software.  
Fast Flashing Link is good and active.  
Slow Flashing This port is disabled by software.  
Down/27  
Down/51  
Rear port  
status  
Green  
Green  
Status  
Switch  
status  
Flashing  
The switch is booting up and performing  
a self-test.  
On  
Self-test passed successfully and  
switch is operational.  
Off  
On  
Off  
The switch failed the self-test.  
Power is present.  
PWR  
Switch Pow Green  
er Status  
Switch is not connected to a power  
source.  
Speed  
RJ45/SFP  
Uplink port  
speed  
Green  
Amber  
Steady  
This port is set to operate at 1 Gb/s,  
and the link is good.  
Flashing  
Steady  
This port is disabled by software.  
This port is set to operate at 10/100  
Mb/s, and the link is good.  
Flashing  
Steady  
This port is disabled by software.  
Link is OK.  
Link/Act  
RJ45/SFP  
Uplink port  
status  
Green  
Off  
Flashing  
Traffic activity.  
No link/No traffic.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 29  
Label  
Type  
Meaning  
Color  
State  
Link/Act  
Port conne  
ction status  
Green  
Steady  
Flashing  
Station connected at 10/100 Mb/s.  
Traffic activity at 10/100 Mb/s.  
No link/No traffic.  
Off  
PoE (applie PoE port  
Green  
Off  
Steady  
Power is supplied to the port.  
No power is supplied to the port.  
s to PWR  
models  
only)  
power  
status  
Base  
Base unit  
status for  
stack mode  
Green  
Amber  
ON  
ON  
This unit is permanent base in stack  
mode.  
This unit is selected as temporary base  
in stack mode.  
Back panel  
The back panel of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is shown in  
panel" (page 29) describes the components on the back panel.  
Figure 7  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series back panel  
Table 3  
Components on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series back panel  
Item Description  
1
2
3
4
AC power receptacle  
Kensington lock  
Base Unit select switch  
Additional 1000BaseT RJ-45 connector rear ports.  
For switch operating mode: ports 27,28 on 2526T models and  
ports 51,52 on 2550T models.  
For stack operating mode: Link UP, Link DOWN for connecting  
with other units in stack.  
Kensington lock  
Using the Kensington lock, you can secure your switch. Wrap the steel cable  
around a secure immovable object, insert the cable lock in the Kensington  
Security Lock, and turn the key.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
30 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware  
Cooling fans  
Cooling fans are located on one side of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
Series to provide cooling for the internal components. When you install  
the switch, be sure to allow enough space on both sides of the switch for  
adequate ventilation.  
AC power receptacle  
The AC power receptacle accepts the AC power cord that is supplied with  
the switch. For installation outside North America, make sure that you  
have the proper power cord for your region. Any cord used must have a  
CEE-22 standard V female connector on one end and must meet the IEC  
(page 30) lists specifications for international power cords.  
Table 4  
International power cord specifications  
Country/Plug  
description  
Specifications  
Typical plug  
Continental Europe:  
220 or 230 VAC 50 Hz  
Single phase  
CEE7 standard VII  
male plug  
Harmonized cord  
(HAR marking on  
the outside of the  
cord jacket to comply  
with the CENELEC  
Harmonized  
Document HD-21)  
U.S./Canada/Japan:  
100 or 120 VAC 50– 60  
Hz Single phase  
NEMA5-15P male  
plug  
UL recognized (UL  
stamped on cord  
jacket)  
CSA certified (CSA  
label secured to the  
cord)  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 31  
Country/Plug  
description  
Specifications  
Typical plug  
United Kingdom:  
240 VAC  
50 Hz  
Single phase  
BS1363 male plug  
with fuse  
Harmonized cord  
Australia:  
240 VAC  
50 Hz  
Single phase  
AS3112-1981 Male plug  
CAUTION  
Read immediately.  
Inspect the power cord and determine if it provides the proper  
plug and is appropriately certified for use with your electrical  
system. Immediately discard this power cord if it is inappropriate  
for electrical systems in your country and obtain the proper cord  
as required by your national electrical codes or ordinances.  
See the technical documentation for this product for detailed  
installation procedures to be followed by qualified service  
personnel.  
CAUTION  
Vorsicht:  
Bitte sofort lesen.  
Sehen Sie nach, ob dieses Netzkabel über den richtigen  
Stecker verfügt und für die Verwendung in Ihrem  
Stromversogungsnetz zertifiziert ist. Falls dieses Kabel nicht für  
das Stromversorgungsnetz in Ihrem Land geeignet ist, darf es  
nicht verwendet werden. Besorgen Sie sich ein Kabel, das die  
Vorschriften der Zulassungsbehörden in Ihrem Land erfüllt.  
Die technische Dokumentation dieses Produkts enthält  
ausführliche Installationsanweisungen, die nur von qualifiziertem  
Kundendienstpersonal ausgeführt werden dürfen.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
32 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware  
ATTENTION  
Attention:  
Lisez ceci immédiatement.  
Examinez ce cordon d’alimentation pour déterminer s’il dispose de la fiche  
appropriée et s’il est bien agréé pour utilisation sur votre installation électrique.  
Débarrassez-vous en immédiatement s’il ne convient pas à l’utilisation sur  
le secteur électrique en usage dans votre pays et procurez-vous un cordon  
conforme à la réglementation nationale en vigueur.  
Reportez-vous à la documentation technique de ce produit pour obtenir des  
instructions détaillées d’installation, destinées à un technicien qualifié.  
CAUTION  
Attenzione:  
Leggere attentamente.  
Controllare questo cavo di alimentazione, verificarne il  
collegamento con la presa appropriata nonché la certificazione  
per l’uso nell’impianto elettrico posseduto. Non utilizzare  
assolutamente in caso tale cavo non sia adatto al sistema elettrico  
del paese in cui viene utilizzato e richiederne un altro certificato  
dall’ente nazionale di fornitura elettrica.  
Per le procedure di installazione che devono essere seguite dal  
personale di servizio, consultare questa documentazione tecnica  
del prodotto.  
CAUTION  
Advertencia:  
Sírvase leer inmediatamente.  
Inspeccione este cable de alimentación eléctrica y determine si  
viene con el enchufe apropiado y está debidamente certificado  
para el uso con su sistema eléctrico. Si no cumple con los  
reglamentos del sistema eléctrico de su país, despójese de  
este cable de alimentación inmediatamente y obtenga el cable  
requerido, según las ordenanzas y códigos eléctricos nacionales.  
Refiérase a la documentación técnica de este producto para  
recibir información detallada sobre los procedimientos que el  
personal calificado de reparaciones deberá seguir.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware components of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 33  
WARNING  
Removal of the power cord is the only way to turn off power to this  
device. The power cord must always be connected in a location  
that can be accessed quickly and safely in case of an emergency.  
WARNING  
Vorsicht:  
Die Stromzufuhr zu diesem Gerät kann nur durch Ziehen des  
Netzstromkabels unterbrochen werden. Die Netzsteckdose, an  
die das Netzstromkabel angeschlossen ist, muß sich stets an  
einem Ort befinden, der bei einem Notfall schnell und einfach  
zugänglich ist.  
WARNING  
Avertissement:  
Le débranchement du cordon d’alimentation constitue le  
seul moyen de mettre cet appareil hors tension. Le cordon  
d’alimentation doit donc toujours être branché dans une prise  
accessible pour faciliter la mise hors tension en cas d’urgence.  
WARNING  
Advertencia:  
La única forma de desconectar la alimentación de este dispositivo  
es desenchufar el cable de alimentación. El cable de alimentación  
siempre debe estar conectado en una ubicación que permita  
acceder al cable de forma rápida y segura en caso de emergencia.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware  
WARNING  
Avvertenza:  
Estrarre il cavo di alimentazione è l’unico sistema per spegnere il  
dispositivo. Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere sempre collegato  
in una posizione che permetta l’accesso facile e sicuro in caso  
di emergenza.  
Network configuration examples  
This section provides network configuration examples using the Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series switches. In these examples, traffic Quality of  
service (QoS) feature can be used to prioritize the traffic of the network to  
ensure uninterrupted traffic of critical applications. The examples are:  
Small office desktop switch application  
(page 35) shows the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series used as a  
desktop switch in a small office environment. The desktop workstations and  
servers are connected directly to the switch ports. Alternatively, an ERS  
2500 series switch that supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) can provide  
connectivity and power to Wireless LAN Access Points (WLAN APs) in  
addition to desktop workstations and servers.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Network configuration examples 35  
Figure 8  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series used as a desktop switch  
Branch office workgroup switch application  
switch" (page 36) shows the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series used as  
a workgroup switch in an enterprise branch office environment. Desktop  
workstations and servers are connected directly to the switch ports.  
Alternatively, an ERS 2500 series switch that supports Power over Ethernet  
(PoE) can provide connectivity and power to IP Phones and Wireless LAN  
Access Points (WLAN APs) in addition to desktop workstations and servers.  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switch can optionally be stacked  
up to 8 units to form a single virtual switch providing up to 384 10/100Mb/s  
connections and 16 1000Mb/s connections.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
36 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware  
Figure 9  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series used as a workgroup switch  
Medium sized office wiring closet switch application  
37) shows the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series used as a wiring  
closet switch in a medium to large enterprise office environment. Desktop  
workstations, IP Phones, and WLAN APs are connected directly to the  
switch ports.  
(page 37) shows the Ethernet Routing Switch 1600 series used as a  
backbone switch, connecting to Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 – S1, with  
an optional 1000BASE-SX SFP GBIC for maximum bandwidth. S2 is a  
single virtual switch stack of three ERS 2500 switches providing 10 or  
100Mb/s, also connecting to the ERS 1624G backbone switch with an  
optional 1000BASE-SX SFP GBIC in both switches.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Network configuration examples 37  
Figure 10  
Configuring power workgroups and a wiring closet switch  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
38 Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series hardware  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
Series stacking  
This chapter includes information about the stacking features, such as stack  
capabilities, stacking functionality delivery, stack configuration, and Auto Unit  
Replacement. This chapter contains information about the following topics:  
Stacking capabilities  
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series contain two built-in rear  
ports that can be used as stacking/cascade ports to enable a stack of up to  
eight units.  
A stack can consist of Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T, Nortel Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2550T, Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR, and  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T-PWR units.  
The stack ports on ERS 2500 series switches provide 4Gbps (FDX) stack  
bandwidth for an aggregate of up to 32Gbps for a stack of eight units.  
A stack of Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switches can also consist of  
a mix of stack pre-enabled units as well as non pre-enabled units. The non  
pre-enabled units in a stack must meet the following requirements before  
they are added into a stack configuration:  
contain a valid license file (a license file contains the switch MAC  
addresses)  
Operational mode of rear ports operating in Stacking Mode  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
40 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
Stacking functionality delivery  
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switches allow you to  
stack multiple switches together to create a single virtual switch that can  
be managed as a single device. Stacking functionality is delivered in  
two distinctively different ways on Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series  
switches:  
Through stack enabled units with order codes AL2515xxx-E6. The  
rear ports of stack enabled ERS 2500 switch are factory pre-enabled,  
configured, and operating in Stacking Mode by default and are ready  
to stack. These units do not require or use the software licensing  
mechanism.  
Through software using a licensing mechanism for standalone units with  
order codes AL2500xxx-E6. Standalone ERS 2500 switches require the  
purchase of a Stacking License Kit for each license to create a license  
file, which unlocks stacking capability on standalone units.  
Stack enabled switches  
The stack enabled unit rear ports are configured in Stacking Mode at  
the factory and are ready for immediate use for connection in a stack  
configuration. Stacking Mode is the default operating mode that cannot be  
overridden by a factory default. Standalone Mode operation is still available  
for configuration on the rear-ports of stack enabled units. For information  
on adding or replacing a new unit, see "Adding/Replacing a stack unit"  
All factory pre-enabled units are identifiable through CLI, Web UI, and  
Device Manager with the text Stack Enabled included in the switch  
description for identification purposes.  
Standalone configuration with license files  
Standalone units are not pre-enabled with stacking capability in the factory  
and require the use of a software based licensing mechanism to unlock  
stacking functionality for activation on the rear ports. Standalone units use  
the GenLic engine for decryption of a license file. The license file must  
contain the switch MAC address to unlock the stacking functionality.  
Standalone units require the purchase of an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
series Stacking License Kit, of which there are four types available. Each kit  
contains a License Certificate with a License Authorization Code (LAC) that  
enables a specific number of stacking licenses for one or multiple ERS 2500  
series switches. Each ERS 2500 series switch requires one license file to  
unlock stacking functionality. A single license file can contain up to 1000  
switch MAC addresses for installation on multiple switches.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Stacking functionality delivery 41  
A Stacking License Certificate contains instructions on how to deposit  
license entitlements into a license bank, enter switch MAC address(es),  
create the license file, then download and copy the license file onto each  
switch requiring stacking functionality. These instructions are carried out on  
the Nortel Licensing portal web site at: www.nortellicensing.com.  
ATTENTION  
Once a valid license file is downloaded on to an Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500 Series switch, you can configure the operational mode of rear ports to  
Stacking Mode. Although the rear ports are set to Stacking Mode, a reboot of the  
switch is required to fully enable the stacking operation.  
Working with license files using the CLI  
With the following commands, you can copy the license file to your switch  
and display or clear the existing license information:  
copy tftp license command The copy tftp license command  
copies the license file from a TFTP server to your switch. After you copy the  
license to the switch, you need to perform a reboot to activate the license.  
ATTENTION  
The license is copied to NVRAM. If you reset the switch to default, this removes  
the license from the switch. But the stacking feature is enabled until you configure  
the switch to Standalone Mode.  
The syntax for the copy tftp license command is:  
copy tftp license <A.B.C.D> <WORD>  
The copy tftp license command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
parameters and variables for the copy tftp license command.  
copy tftp license command parameters  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
<A.B.C.D>  
<WORD>  
The TFTP server address.  
The software license filename on the TFTP server.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
42 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
show license command The show license command displays the  
existing licenses on your switch. The syntax for the show license  
command is:  
show license { <1-10> | all }  
The show license command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
Table 5  
show license command parameters  
Parameters and variables  
Description  
<1-10>  
all  
Displays the selected licenses.  
Displays all licenses.  
The following figure displays a sample output for the show license all  
command after installing the license file.  
Figure 11  
show license all command output  
clear license command The clear license command deletes the  
existing licenses on your switch.  
The syntax for the clear license command is:  
clear license { <1-10> | all }  
The clear license command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
Copying the license file using the Java Device Manager  
Use the Java Device Manager to copy the license file to the 2500 Series  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Stacking functionality delivery 43  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu select Edit > File System.  
The FileSystem dialog box appears.  
2
Click the License File tab.  
The License File tab appears.  
3
4
In the LoadServerAddr field, enter the TFTP server address.  
In the LicenseFileName field, enter the software license filename  
on the TFTP server.  
ATTENTION  
The LicenseFileName field is case sensitive and you can use a maximum  
of 64 characters including the file extension. Numerals are allowed in the  
LicenseFileName but special characters like @, -, #, and so on are not allowed.  
5
In the LicenseFileAction field, select dnldLicense.  
6
7
Click Apply.  
Click Refresh.  
The LicenseFileStatus field displays the file copy progress. After  
the file copy completes, a warning message appears prompting you  
to reboot the switch and activate the license.  
8
9
To reboot the switch, choose Edit > Chassis  
Under the System tab, select the reboot option and click Apply.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
Downloading the license files using the Web-based management  
interface  
You can download the license files to the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch. To  
download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series license files, a properly  
configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server must be present in  
your network, and the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series must have an  
IP address.  
To download a license file, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > License Download.  
The License Download page appears.  
Figure 12  
License Download page  
The following table describes the fields on the License Download  
page.  
Table 6  
License Download page fields  
Fields  
Description  
License Image Filename  
Select Target  
Type the valid license image filename.  
Choose the target address.  
TFTP Server IP Address  
Type the IP address of your TFTP download  
host.  
Start Load of New License File  
Remove License File Number  
Choose Yes to start downloading the new license  
file immediately and No to cancel.  
Choose the license number to be removed.  
2
3
Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list.  
Click Submit.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Stack configuration 45  
—End—  
Stack configuration  
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series provides the capability for  
intelligent fail-safe resilient stacking of up to eight units in a single switch  
stack. This provides uninterrupted connectivity of up to 400 user ports in a  
virtual switch managed as a single unit.  
ATTENTION  
All ERS 2500 series switches must be running software release 4.1 before being  
connected in a stack configuration.  
To set up a stack, do the following:  
Step Action  
1
2
Power down all switches.  
Set the Unit Select switch at the rear of the non-base units to the  
off position.  
3
Plug all stack cables in to the rear RJ-45 cascade ports and ensure  
the cables are connected from Cascade Down on the first unit to  
Cascade Up on the second unit and so on. The last unit in the stack  
must be connected back to the first unit for full stack resiliency.  
Ensure all the cascade cables are properly connected.  
4
Power up all the switches in the stack starting with the Base unit.  
ATTENTION  
In a mixed stack of 2526T, 2526T-PWR, 2550T, and 2550T-PWR, any  
switch can act as the Base unit.  
—End—  
ATTENTION  
The rear ports must be operating Stacking Mode before adding a switch into  
a stack.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
46 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
Configuring the operational mode on rear ports using the CLI  
You can use the following commands to configure the operational mode of  
rear ports into Stacking or Standalone Mode:  
rear-ports mode command  
The rear-ports mode command configures the operational mode of  
the rear-port.  
The syntax for the rear-ports mode is:  
# rear-ports mode [unit <1-8>] {standalone|stacking}  
The rear-ports mode command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
and variables for the rear-ports mode command.  
Table 7  
rear-ports mode command  
Parameters and variables  
[unit <1-8>]  
Description  
Specifies the unit number. You can use a  
maximum of eight units.  
Specifies the operational mode of the selected  
unit.  
{standalone|stacking}  
show rear-ports mode command  
The show rear-ports mode displays the operational mode of the rear  
port.  
The syntax for the show rear-ports mode is:  
# show rear-ports mode  
The show rear-ports mode command is executed in Global  
Configuration command mode in the CLI. There are no parameters and  
variables for show rear-ports mode command.  
sample output of the show rear-ports mode command when the rear  
ports are set and running in Stacking Mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Stack configuration 47  
Figure 13  
show rear-ports mode command output  
Configuring the operational mode of rear ports using the Device  
Manager  
Use the Device Manager to configure the operational mode of the rear ports  
into Standalone or Stacking Mode in the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
Series. For more information on configuring the operational mode of rear  
Rear ports and stacking  
The rear panel view of a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series  
switch consists of two RJ-45 1000BaseT ports and a Unit Select switch. In  
Stacking Mode, the two rear ports become the Cascade Down and Cascade  
Up ports for connecting switch units in a stack configuration. The rear panel  
components are illustrated in the following diagram:  
Figure 14  
Rear panel components  
Unit Select switch  
The Unit Select switch is used to designate a switch in the stack as the  
base unit. Sliding the switch to the right designates that switch as the base  
unit. Only one switch in a stack has the Unit Select switch in the base unit  
position. All other switches in the stack must have the Unit Select switch in  
the left position.  
The base unit designation of a switch is also displayed on the front panel  
LED display. For more information, see Table 2 "Ethernet Routing Switch  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
48 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
Cascade Down port  
The Cascade Down port is used to connect this switch unit to the next unit  
in the stack through a stack cable. A connection from this port must be  
attached to the Cascade Up port of the next switch in the stack. A return  
cable from the Cascade Down port of the last unit must be connected to  
the Cascade Up port of the first unit to complete the stack connection.  
ATTENTION  
Each Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switch is supplied with one  
46-cm stack cable to create a stack connection. For stacking three or more units  
(maximum 8 units per stack), you need to order the 1.5 or 3 meters stack return  
cable (order number AL2518002-E6 and AL2518003-E6, respectively).  
Cascade Up port  
The Cascade Up port is used to accept a stack cable connection from  
an adjacent unit above. A return cable from the Cascade Up port of the  
first unit must be connected to the Cascade Down port of the last unit to  
complete a stack connection.  
ATTENTION  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 series switches use tested and certified  
Category 5E UTP cables as stack cables. All Nortel branded ERS 2500 series  
stack cables are for use with these switches. However, Cat 5E stack cable  
connections of up to 100 meters is possible between each ERS 2500 switch but  
not officially supported. Using non-Nortel tested and certified stack cables for  
such configurations are solely the user’s responsibility should any stack operation  
issues occur.  
The following illustration demonstrates the proper stack cable crossover  
configuration. Failure to use this configuration can result in loss of  
connectivity. This example shows a cascade down configuration  
Connecting stack cables  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stack configuration 49  
1. Base Unit  
2. Cascade Cable  
3. Cascade Cable (used for return)  
Initial stack installation  
During the initial installation of the stack, the software automatically  
determines the physical order of all units in the stack according to the  
position of the base unit within the stack. Thereafter, the individual units  
maintain their original unit numbering, even if the position of one or more  
units in the stack is changed.  
For example, when the stack is initially powered, the base unit becomes unit  
1 and the unit that the base unit connects to (via the Cascade Down cable)  
becomes unit 2 (and the next unit is unit 3 and so on), until the maximum  
stack configuration (up to 8 units) is reached. If the base unit is changed to  
another unit in the stack, the new base unit keeps its original unit number  
in the stack.  
Stack MAC address  
When a switch participates in a stack configuration, a stack MAC address is  
automatically assigned during stack initialization. The stack MAC address is  
the base unit MAC address plus 1. If another unit in the stack is assigned  
as the base unit, the new stack MAC address is the MAC address of the  
new base unit plus 1. The original stack IP address still applies to the new  
base unit.  
Stack configurations  
Due to stack parameters being associated with the base unit, the physical  
stack order depends on the base unit position and whether the stack is  
configured cascade up (stack up) or cascade down (stack down). This  
designation depends on the stack cabling arrangement.  
The system automatically numbers the physical units based on the  
designated base unit (Unit 1). In a cascade down configuration, the base  
unit is physically located as the top unit in the stack. The cable connected to  
the Cascade Down connector of the base unit terminates in the Cascade Up  
connector on the next unit in the stack which is physically located below the  
base unit. This next unit is designated Unit 2. The stack is wired downward  
through the units and the system continues to number in this manner  
throughout the stack. In this configuration, the base unit discovers the  
stack in a cascade down (stack down) direction. The following illustration  
demonstrates a cascade down (stack down) configuration.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
50 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
ATTENTION  
Many network management software packages assume a cascade down (stack  
down) configuration, Nortel recommends the usage of this configuration.  
Cascade down stack configuration  
In a cascade up (stack up) configuration, the base unit is physically  
located as the top unit in the stack. The cable connected to the Cascade  
Down connector of the base unit terminates in the Cascade Up connector  
physically located at the bottom of the stack. This next unit is designated Unit  
2. The stack is wired upward through the units and the system continues to  
number in this manner throughout the stack. In this configuration, the base  
unit discovers the stack in a cascade up (stack up) direction. The following  
illustration demonstrates a cascade up (stack up) configuration.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stack configuration 51  
Cascade up stack configuration  
Regardless of stack configuration, the following applies:  
When power is applied to the stack the base unit initializes, typically  
within 60 seconds, and the entire stack powers up as a single logical unit.  
A RS-232 communications cable can be attached to the console port of  
any switch in the stack to establish a console connection.  
A software upgrade can be performed on the stack from any switch using  
the console interface, a Telnet session, the web-based management  
interface, or any SNMP-based management software.  
The stack can be managed using a Telnet session, web-based  
management interface, or any SNMP-based management software  
through any stack switch port.  
When stacking two or more switches. use the 3 meters cascade  
max-return cable (part number AL2518003-E6) to complete the link  
from the last unit in the stack to the base unit.  
Temporary base unit  
If an assigned base unit fails, the next unit in the stack order automatically  
becomes the new temporary base unit. This change is indicated by the  
Base LED on the temporary base unit LED display panel moving to a steady  
amber state.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
52 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
This automatic failover is only a temporary safeguard. If the stack  
configuration loses power, the temporary base unit cannot power up as  
the base unit when power is restored. Also, if the original unit rejoins the  
stack, it cannot resume base unit status. For this reason, always assign  
the temporary base unit as the base unit until the failed unit is repaired  
or replaced.  
ATTENTION  
If the temporary base unit is not assigned as the new base unit, and the temporary  
base unit fails, the next unit in the stack order becomes the temporary base  
unit. This process continues after successive failures until only two units are left  
in the stack.  
Redundant cascade stacking  
The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series allows a stack of up to 8  
units into a dual-path cascade stack. If any single unit fails or if a cable is  
accidently disconnected, other units in the stack remain operational without  
interruption.  
In addition to increasing bandwidth, the software uses the cables to provide  
two paths between units. If one path breaks the data travels over the  
remaining path with half the normal inter-switch bandwidth.  
The following diagram shows an example of a stack configuration with a unit  
failure in the stack. This illustrates:  
Unit 3 becomes non-operational due to a unit failure, cable  
disconnection, or a loss of power.  
Units 2 and 4, directly upstream and downstream from Unit 3, sense  
the loss of link signals from unit 3. The software causes all the data to  
traverse the remaining path.  
The Cascade Down LED for Unit 2 and the Cascade Up LED for Unit 4  
turn amber to indicate an error has been detected.  
The remaining stack units continue to be connected.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Stack configuration 53  
Redundant cascade stacking  
Removing a stack unit  
If a unit is removed from the stack, the following switch configuration settings  
revert to those configured before the unit became a member of the stack:  
IP address  
Console, Web, Telnet, and SNMP passwords  
SNMP community strings  
Adding/Replacing a stack unit  
To replace a failed stack unit or insert a new unit into a stack, follow this  
procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Upload a copy of the stack configuration file to a TFTP server.  
Since unit failure is not a predictable situation, it is suggested that  
the stack configuration file is backed up regularly to a TFTP server.  
Obtain the new ERS 2500 switch.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
54 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
Ensure that the new switch is set to factory default values. Then,  
if the unit is a standalone ERS 2500 switch, ensure that a valid  
stacking license.dat file is installed on the switch and the rear ports  
are operating in Stacking Mode. If the unit is a Stack Enabled  
ERS 2500 switch, then the unit is ready for adding or replacing.  
For information on installing a stacking license, see "Standalone  
3
4
Download the configuration file to the new unit.  
Manually insert the new unit in the stack. Turn off the new unit  
inserted into the stack and manually replace the failed unit in the  
stack. Plug in the stack cables into the appropriate cascade ports.  
Power up the new unit in the stack.  
The new unit joins the stack and the configuration of the failed unit is  
replicated onto it. Once the replication is completed, the new unit  
is reset and rejoins the stack automatically.  
—End—  
If the base unit is being replaced, remember that the stack elected a  
temporary base unit. The new unit cannot automatically resume operation  
as the base unit even with the Unit Select switch set to Base. To restore the  
stack to its original running state with the new unit set to Base using the  
Unit Select switch, the switch stack must be reset.  
Auto Unit Replacement  
The Auto Unit Replacement (AUR) feature enables users to replace a unit  
from a stack while retaining the configuration of the unit. This feature  
requires the stack power to be on during the unit replacement.  
The main feature of the AUR is the ability to retain the configuration (CFG)  
image of a unit in a stack during a unit replacement. The retained CFG  
image from the old unit is restored to the new unit. Because retained CFG  
images are kept in the DRAM of the stack, the stack power must be kept on  
during the procedure.  
ATTENTION  
In order for AUR to function properly, the new unit and the existing units in the  
stack must all be running the same version of software (Release 4.1 software  
or later).  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Auto Unit Replacement 55  
ATTENTION  
AUR is intended for a stack configuration of two or more units. In a two-unit stack  
configuration, if a unit fails, the remaining unit becomes a standalone switch. AUR  
loads the configuration of the failed unit in the replacement of ERS 2500 Series  
unit if the failed unit was a non-Base Unit.  
AUR is not designed for the situation of removing and reinserting the same switch  
(with the same MAC address).  
Other information related to this feature:  
The new unit must be the same hardware configuration as the old,  
including the same number of ports.  
If the administrator adds a new unit with a different hardware  
configuration, the configuration of this unit is used.  
If the administrator adds a new unit with the same hardware  
configuration, the previous configuration of the new unit is lost. It is  
overwritten with the restored configuration from the stack.  
This feature can be disabled/enabled at any time using the CLI. The  
default mode is ENABLE.  
Customer log messages are provided.  
ATTENTION  
After booting a stack, use the CLI command show stack auto-unit-  
replacement from a unit console to find out if that unit is ready for replacement.  
AUR function  
The CFG mirror image is a mirror of a CFG image (in FLASH) of a unit in  
a stack. The mirror image does not reside in the same unit with the CFG  
image. The unit that contains the CFG image is called the Associated Unit  
(AU) of the CFG mirror image. The MAC Address of the AU is called the  
Associated Mac Address (AMA) of the CFG mirror image.  
An active CFG Mirror Image is a CFG mirror image that has its AU in the  
stack. An INACTIVE CFG Mirror Image is a CFG mirror image for which  
the associated AU has been removed from the stack. When a CFG mirror  
image becomes INACTIVE, the INACTIVE CFG mirror image is copied  
to another unit.  
The stack always keeps two copies of an INACTIVE CFG mirror image in  
the stack in case one unit is removed–the other unit can still provide the  
backup INACTIVE CFG mirror image.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
56 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
CFG mirror image process  
The CFG mirror image process is triggered by specific events.  
Power Cycle After a power cycle, all the CFG images in a stack are  
mirrored.  
images in a three-unit stack after the stack is powered on. Unit 1 is the  
Based Unit (BU) and all other units are Non-Based Units (NBU).  
Unit 1 (BU) contains mirror images for unit 2 (CFG 2) and unit 3 (CFG 3).  
Unit 2 (NBU), is the TEMP-BU. It contains a mirror image of unit 1 (CFG  
1), in case the BU (unit 1) is removed from the stack.  
All three mirror images (CFG 1, CFG 2, and CFG 3) are active.  
Unit 2 is the Associated Unit of the CFG 2 mirror image.  
The Mac Address 2 is the Associated Mac Address (AMA) of the CFG  
2 mirror image.  
Figure 15  
CFG mirror process in stack  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Auto Unit Replacement 57  
Adding a unit In a stack that does not have any INACTIVE CFG mirror  
images, adding a new unit causes the CFG image of the new unit to be  
mirrored in the stack. For example, in Figure 16 "CFG mirror images in the  
stack after adding unit 4" (page 57), after adding unit 4 to the stack, the  
CFG 4 mirror image is created in the BU (unit 1).  
Figure 16  
CFG mirror images in the stack after adding unit 4  
Removing an NBU When an NBU is removed from a stack, the related  
CFG mirror image in the stack becomes INACTIVE.  
The AUR feature ensures that the stack always has two copies of an  
INACTIVE CFG mirror image. These two copies must not reside in the  
same unit in the stack.  
For example, after the removal of unit 4 from the stack shown in Figure 16  
mirror image becomes INACTIVE (see Figure 17 "CFG mirror images after  
removing unit 4" (page 58)). Another copy of the INACTIVE CFG 4 mirror  
image is also created in unit 2.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
58 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
Figure 17  
CFG mirror images after removing unit 4  
Removing a BU When a BU is removed, the TEMP-BU assumes the  
role of the BU. Because all the CFG mirror images of the NBUs reside in  
the removed BU, the TEMP-BU mirrors all the CFG image of the NBUs  
in the stack.  
After the removal of the BU from the stack shown in Figure 16 "CFG mirror  
has to mirror all the CFG images in the stack (see Figure 18 "CFG mirror  
also ensures that the stack always has two copies of an INACTIVE CFG  
mirror image.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Auto Unit Replacement 59  
Figure 18  
CFG mirror images in the stack after removing the BU (unit 1)  
Unit 2 becomes the TEMP-BU.  
The CFG 1 mirror image (residing in unit 2) becomes INACTIVE.  
A second copy of the INACTIVE CFG 1 mirror image is created in unit 3.  
The TEMP-BU (unit 2) contains all CFG mirror images of the stack’s  
NBUs.  
The CFG 2 mirror image is created in unit 3. Unit 3 becomes the next  
TEMP-BU in case the current TEMP-BU is removed.  
Restoring a CFG image  
Restoring a CFG image is a process that overwrites the CFG image of a  
new unit in a stack with an INACTIVE mirror image stored in the stack.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
60 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
ATTENTION  
Restore a CFG image to a new unit happens only if the following conditions are  
met.  
The AUR feature is enabled.  
There is at least one INACTIVE CFG mirror image in the stack.  
The MAC Address of the new unit is different from all the AMA of the  
INACTIVE CFG mirror images in the stack.  
The image restore process consists of the following steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Adding a new unit to a stack  
The INACTIVE CFG mirror image in the stack is sent to the new unit.  
The INACTIVE CFG mirror image becomes ACTIVE.  
3
4
The new unit saves the received CFG image to its flash.  
The new unit resets itself.  
—End—  
For example, if a unit 5 (MAC Address 5) is added to the stack shown in  
The INACTIVE CFG 1 mirror image is copied to the CFG 5 image. Unit  
5 now has the configuration of unit 1 that is no longer in the stack.  
The INACTIVE CFG 1 mirror image in unit 2 becomes ACTIVE.  
The INACTIVE CFG 1 mirror image in unit 3 is removed.  
The MAC Address 5 of the unit 5 becomes the new AMA of the CFG  
1 mirror image.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Unit Replacement 61  
Figure 19  
CFG mirror images in the stack after adding unit 5  
Synchronizing the CFG mirror images with CFG images  
A CFG mirror image is updated whenever a CFG flash synchronization  
occurs in the AU.  
Configuring AUR using the CLI  
This section describes the CLI commands used in AUR configuration.  
show stack auto-unit-replacement command  
The show stack auto-unit-replacement command displays the  
current AUR settings.  
The syntax for this command is:  
show stack auto-unit-replacement  
The stack auto-unit-replacement enable command is in all  
command modes.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
62 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
There are no parameters or variables for the show stack auto-unit  
replacement command.  
stack auto-unit-replacement enable command  
The stack auto-unit-replacement enable command enables AUR  
on the switch.  
The syntax for this command is:  
stack auto-unit-replacement enable  
The stack auto-unit-replacement enable command is executed  
in the Global Configuration mode.  
There are no parameters or variables for the stack auto-unit-  
replacement enable command.  
no stack auto-unit-replacement enable command  
The no stack auto-unit-replacement enable command disables  
AUR on the switch.  
The syntax for this command is:  
no stack auto-unit-replacement enable  
The no stack auto-unit-replacement enable command is  
executed in the Global Configuration mode.  
There are no parameters or variables for the no stack  
auto-unit-replacement enable command.  
default stack auto-unit-replacement enable command  
The default stack auto-unit-replacement enable command  
restores the default AUR settings.  
The syntax for this command is:  
default stack auto-unit-replacement enable  
The default stack auto-unit-replacement enable command is  
executed in the Global Configuration mode.  
There are no parameters or variables for the default stack  
auto-unit-replacement enable command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Unit Replacement 63  
Configuring AUR using Device Manager  
You also can enable or disable AUR using Device Manager by toggling the  
AutoUnitReplacementEnabled field in the System tab (see "System tab"  
Displaying unit stack uptime  
You can display the uptime for each unit in a stack. Unit stack uptime  
collects the stack uptime for each unit in a stack and reports this information  
when requested. You can determine how long each unit is connected to the  
stack. You can use the show stack-info uptime to display the unit  
uptimes. The syntax for the show stack-info uptime is  
show stack-info uptime  
The show stack-info uptime is executed in Privileged EXEC  
command mode and takes no parameters.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
64 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series stacking  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
System configuration software features  
This chapter describes the software features used for system configuration  
on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series. It includes information about  
the following topics:  
x-ref to switch management features  
x-ref to ethernet port management features  
x-ref to other features  
Switch management features  
Configuration and switch management  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series that is shipped directly from the  
factory is ready to operate in any 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX standard  
network.  
You must assign an IP address to the switch. You can set both addresses  
by using the Console port or BootP, which resides on the switch. You can  
manage the switch using:  
Command Line Interface (CLI)  
The CLI is used to automate general management and configuration  
of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500. Use the CLI through a Telnet  
connection or through the serial port on the console. See "CLI Basics"  
(page 81) for more information.  
Java-based Device Manager  
Device Manager is a Java-based set of graphical network management  
applications used to configure and manage an Ethernet Routing Switch  
more information.  
Web-based management  
You can manage the network from the World Wide Web. Access the  
web-based Graphical User Interface (GUI) through the Embedded Web  
Server (EWS), the HTML-based browser located on your network. The  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
66 System configuration software features  
GUI lets you configure, monitor, and maintain your network through Web  
browsers. You can also download software using the Web.  
For information about web-based management, see "Using the  
Any generic SNMP-based network management software.  
You can use any generic SNMP-based network management software  
to configure and manage an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
Console port settings  
The efault settings for the Console port are:  
9600 baud with eight data bits  
One stop bit  
No parity as the communications format  
Flow control set to disabled  
Switch banner  
When you connect to the switch through the Console port or through a  
Telnet connection, you are presented with a Nortel switch banner. Enter  
Ctrl+Y to proceed to the CLI interface.  
Figure 20  
Login banner  
User name and password  
You can use the CLI to set user names as well as passwords for system  
access through the CLI, Telnet, and web-based management. The syntax  
for the username command is:  
username <username> <password> [ro|rw]  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Switch management features 67  
You can also set the CLI password using the cli password command,  
or the Password Setting web-based management page. When you log on  
to the switch, you are prompted to enter a valid user name. Therefore,  
ensure you are aware of the valid usernames (default RW and RO) before  
you change passwords.  
For the standard software image, the default password for user RO is "user"  
and for user RW is "secure". For the secure software image, the default  
password for RO is "userpasswd" and for RW is "securepasswd".  
For more information about this and other advanced security features  
supported on the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series, see Nortel Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series Security — Configuration and Management  
(NN47215-505).  
Logging in  
If you set a password using the username or cli password command,  
the next time you access the switch, you are prompted for a username  
and password as shown in Figure 21 "Login screen" (page 67) (default  
usernames are RW and RO).  
Figure 21  
Login screen  
Enter a valid user name and password and press Enter. You are then  
directed to the CLI.  
For the standard software image, the default password for user RO is "user"  
and for user RW is "secure". For the secure software image, the default  
password for RO is "userpasswd" and for RW is "securepasswd".  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
68 System configuration software features  
For information about the security features on the switch, see Nortel  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security — Configuration and  
Management (NN47215-505).  
Autosave feature  
By default, every 60 seconds the Ethernet Routing Switch checks whether  
a configuration change has occurred, or if a log message is written to  
nonvolatile storage. If one of these two events has occurred, the system  
automatically saves its configuration and the nonvolatile log to flash memory.  
Also, the system automatically saves the configuration file if a system reset  
command is invoked by the user.  
ATTENTION  
Do not power off the switch within 60 seconds of changing any configuration  
parameters. Doing so causes loss of changes in the configuration parameters.  
You can enable or disable the autosave feature using the autosave enable  
and no autosave enable commands.  
You can use the CLI command copy config nvram to force a manual save of  
the configuration when the autosave feature is disabled.  
Using SNTP  
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) feature synchronizes the  
Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) to an accuracy within 1 second. This  
feature adheres to the IEEE RFC 2030 (MIB is the s5agent). With this  
feature, the system can obtain the time from any RFC 2030-compliant  
NTP/SNTP server.  
ATTENTION  
If you have trouble using this feature, try other NTP servers. Some NTP servers  
can be overloaded or currently inoperable.  
The system attempts to connect to the NTP server at least three times, with  
five minutes duration between each retry. If the connection fails after three  
attempts, the system waits for the next synchronization time (the default is  
24 hours) and begins the process again.  
The SNTP provides a real-time timestamp for the software, shown as  
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).  
If the SNTP is enabled (the default value is disabled), the system  
synchronizes with the configured NTP server at bootup and at  
user-configurable periods thereafter (the default sync interval is 24 hours).  
The first synchronization is not performed until network connectivity is  
established.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Switch management features 69  
The SNTP supports primary and secondary NTP servers. The system tries  
the secondary NTP server only if the primary NTP server is unresponsive.  
Configuring with CLI  
To use the CLI to configure the SNTP feature, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Set the primary and secondary NTP server.  
Enable the SNTP.  
Display the UTC time.  
Optionally, to ensure the synchronization happens immediately,  
force a synchronization.  
—End—  
Setting local time zone  
The SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) for all time  
synchronizations so it is not affected by different time zones. For the switch  
to report the correct time for your local time zone and daylight savings time,  
you must use the following commands:  
Using DNS to ping and Telnet  
You can use the DNS client to ping or Telnet to a host server or to a host  
by name.  
To use this feature, you must configure at least one Domain Name Server  
(DNS). You can also configure a default domain name. If you configure  
a default domain name, that name is appended to host names that do  
not contain a dot. The default domain name and addresses are saved in  
NVRAM.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
70 System configuration software features  
The host names for ping and Telnet cannot be longer than 63 alphanumeric  
characters, and the default DNS domain name cannot be longer than 255  
characters.  
Configuring with CLI  
You can use the CLI to configure the DNS client. Following are the  
commands used to configure the DNS client using the CLI.  
show ip dns command  
ping command  
ip name-server command  
no ip name-server command  
ip domain-name command  
no ip domain-name command  
default ip domain-name command  
You can also use the ping command to specify additional ping parameters,  
including the number of ICMP packets to be sent, the packet size, the  
interval between packets, and the timeout. You can also set the ping to  
continuous, or you can set a debug flag to obtain extra debug information.  
For more information about these commands, see "System configuration  
BootP automatic IP configuration/MAC address  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series has a unique 48-bit hardware  
address, or MAC address, that is printed on a label on the back panel. You  
can use this MAC address when you configure the network BootP server  
to recognize the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series BootP requests. A  
properly configured BootP server lets the switch automatically learn its  
assigned IP address, subnet mask, IP address of the default router (default  
gateway), and software image file name.  
For more information and an example of a BootP configuration file, see  
Choosing a BootP request mode  
The BootP Request Mode field in the IP Configuration window lets you  
choose which method the switch uses to broadcast BootP requests:  
BootP or Default IP  
BootP Always  
BootP Disabled  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Switch management features 71  
BootP or Last Address  
ATTENTION  
Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests, the BootP process  
eventually times out if a reply is not received. When the process times out, the  
BootP request mode automatically changes to BootP Disabled mode. To restart  
the BootP process, change the BootP request mode to any of the three following  
modes:  
BootP or Default IP  
BootP Always  
BootP or Last Address  
BootP or Default IP  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series operates in the BootP or Default  
IP mode (the default mode) as follows:  
After the switch is reset or power cycled, if the switch has a configured  
IP address other than 0.0.0.0 or the default IP address, then the switch  
uses the configured IP address.  
If the configured IP address is 0.0.0.0 or the default IP address  
(192.168.1.1/24), then the switch attempts BootP for 1 minute.  
If BootP succeeds, then the switch uses the IP information provided.  
If BootP fails and the configured IP address is the default, then the  
switch uses the default IP address (192.168.1.1/24).  
If BootP fails and the configured IP address is 0.0.0.0, then the switch  
retains this address.  
BootP Always  
This option lets you manage the switch that is configured with the IP address  
obtained from the BootP server. The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
operates in the BootP Always mode as follows:  
The switch continues to broadcast BootP requests, regardless of  
whether an in-band IP address is set from the console terminal.  
If the switch receives a BootP reply that contains an in-band IP address,  
the switch uses this new in-band IP address.  
If the BootP server is not reachable, you cannot change the in-band  
IP address until the BootP mode is set to BootP Disabled. However,  
after a period of a few minutes (appoximately 10 minutes), the switch  
automatically enters the BootP Disabled mode. You can then configure  
the IP address using the CLI.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
72 System configuration software features  
If an IP address is not currently in use, these actions take effect immediately.  
If an IP address is currently in use, these actions take effect only after the  
switch is reset or power cycled.  
BootP Disabled  
This option lets you manage the switch by using the IP address set from the  
console terminal. The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series operates in the  
BootP Disabled mode as described in the following steps:  
The switch does not broadcast BootP requests, regardless of whether  
an IP address is set from the console terminal.  
The switch can be managed only by using the in-band switch IP address  
set from the console terminal.  
BootP or Last Address  
This option lets you manage the switch even if a BootP server is not  
reachable. The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series operates in the BootP  
or Last Address mode as described in the following steps:  
When you specify the IP data from the console terminal, the IP address  
becomes the in-band address of the switch. BootP requests are not  
broadcast. You can manage the switch using this in-band IP address.  
When you do not specify the in-band IP address from the console  
terminal, the switch broadcasts BootP requests until it receives a BootP  
reply containing an in-band IP address. If the switch does not receive a  
BootP reply that contains an in-band IP address within 10 minutes, the  
switch uses the last in-band IP address it received from a BootP server.  
This IP information is displayed in the Last BootP column.  
If the IP address specified as the in-band IP address is not currently in use,  
these actions take effect immediately. If an IP address is currently in use,  
these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled.  
Default BootP setting  
With Release 4.1 software, the default operational mode for BootP on the  
switch is BootP or Default IP. The switch requests an IP address from  
BootP only if one is not already set from the console terminal (or if the IP  
address is the default IP address: 192.168.1.1).  
Flash memory storage  
Switch software image storage  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series uses flash memory to store the  
switch software image. The flash memory lets you update the software  
image with a newer version without changing the switch hardware (see  
"Upgrading software" (page 229)). An in-band connection between the  
switch and the TFTP load host is required to download the software image.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Switch management features 73  
Configuration File Download/Upload  
The Configuration Management feature lets you store and retrieve the  
configuration parameters of an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to a  
TFTP server. This feature supports two different methods for managing  
system configuration files:  
Binary configuration file management  
ASCII configuration file management  
Requirements  
The following requirements apply to the Configuration file feature:  
The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone  
switch configuration parameters to other standalone switches.  
A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used  
to configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware  
revision and model type as the donor standalone switch.  
configuration file parameter information.  
Table 8  
Parameters not saved to the configuration file  
These parameters are not saved  
In-Band Switch IP Address  
In-Band Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
Configuration Image Filename  
TFTP Server IP Address  
Terminal settings (speed, width, length)  
Binary configuration file  
You can store the configuration parameters of a switch to a TFTP server  
and retrieve the stored parameters to automatically configure a replacement  
switch. Certain requirements apply when automatically configuring a switch  
using this feature (see "Requirements" (page 73)). You can set up the file  
on your TFTP server and set the filename read and write permission to  
enabled before you can save the configuration parameters.  
Although most configuration parameters are saved to the configuration file,  
certain parameters are not saved (see Table 8 "Parameters not saved to the  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
74 System configuration software features  
ASCII configuration file  
You can also store the configuration parameters of a switch/stack as an  
ASCII configuration file and retrieve the stored file to automatically configure  
a replacement switch/stack.  
Autotopology  
You can enable the Optivity* Autotopology* protocol on the Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500 Series using the CLI. For more information about Autotopology,  
go to the Nortel support site: www.nortel.com/support (The product family  
for Optivity and Autotopology is Data and Internet.)  
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (IEEE 802.1ab)  
Release 4.1 software supports the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)  
(IEEE 802.1ab), which lets stations connected to a LAN to advertise their  
capabilities to each other, enabling the discovery of physical topology  
information for network management. LLDP-compatible stations can  
consist of any interconnection device including PCs, IP Phones, switches,  
and routers. Each LLDP station stores LLDP information in a standard  
Management Information Base (MIB), making it possible for the information  
to be accessed by a network management system (NMS) or application.  
Each LLDP station:  
advertises connectivity and management information about the local  
station to adjacent stations on the same 802 LAN (802.3 Ethernet with  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500)  
receives network management information from adjacent stations on  
the same LAN  
ATTENTION  
LLDP works in stack mode.  
LLDP makes it possible to discover certain configuration inconsistencies or  
malfunctions that can result in impaired communications at higher layers.  
For example, it can be used to discover duplex mismatches between an IP  
Phone and the connected switch.  
LLDP is compatible with IETF PROTO MIB (IETF RFC 2922).  
Figure 22 "How LLDP works" (page 75) shows an example of how LLDP  
works in a network.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Switch management features 75  
Figure 22  
How LLDP works  
1. The Ethernet Routing Switch and router advertise chassis or port IDs  
and system descriptions to each other.  
2. The devices store the information about each other in local MIB  
databases, accessible using SNMP.  
3. A network management system retrieves the data stored by each device  
and builds a network topology map.  
LLDP operational modes  
LLDP is a one-way protocol. An LLDP agent can transmit information  
about the capabilities and current status of the system associated with its  
MAC service access point (MSAP) identifier. The LLDP agent can also  
receive information about the capabilities and current status of the system  
associated with a remote MSAP identifier. However, LLDP agents cannot  
solicit information from each other.  
You can set the local LLDP agent to transmit only, receive only, or to both  
transmit and receive LLDP information. You can configure the state for  
LLDP reception and transmission using SNMP or CLI commands.  
Connectivity and management information  
The information fields in each LLDP frame are contained in a Link Layer  
Discovery Protocol Data Unit (LLDPDU) as a sequence of short, variable  
length, information elements known as type, length, value (TLV). Each  
LLDPDU includes the following four mandatory TLVs:  
chassis ID TLV  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
76 System configuration software features  
port ID TLV  
Time to Live TLV  
End Of LLDPDU TLV  
The chassis ID and the port ID values are concatenated to form a logical  
MSAP identifier that is used by the recipient to identify the sending LLDP  
agent and port.  
A non-zero value in the Time to Live (TTL) field of the TTL TLV indicates  
to the receiving LLDP agent how long the LLDPDU information from the  
MSAP identifier remains valid. All LLDPDU information is automatically  
discarded by the receiving LLDP agent if the sender fails to update it  
in a timely manner. A zero value in TTL field of Time To Live TLV tells  
the receiving LLDP agent to discard the information associated with the  
LLDPDU MSAP identifier.  
In addition to the four mandatory TLVs, Release 4.1 software supports the  
basic management TLV set. You can specify which of these optional TLVs  
to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs for each port.  
The optional management TLVs are as follows:  
Port Description TLV  
System Name TLV  
System Description TLV  
System Capabilities TLV (indicates both the system supported  
capabilities and enabled capabilities, such as end station, bridge, or  
router)  
Management Address TLV  
Transmitting LLDPDUs When a transmit cycle is initiated, the LLDP  
manager extracts the managed objects from the LLDP local system MIB  
and formats this information into TLVs. The TLVs are then inserted into  
the LLDPDU.  
LLDPDUs are regularly transmitted at a user-configurable transmit interval  
(tx-delay), or when any of the variables contained in the LLPDU are  
modified on the local system (such as system name or management  
address). Tx-delay is the minimum delay between successive LLDP frame  
transmissions.  
TLV system MIBs The LLDP local system MIB stores the information for  
constructing the various TLVs to be sent. The LLDP remote system MIB  
stores the information received from remote LLDP agents.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet port management features 77  
LLDPDU and TLV error handling LLDPDUs and TLVs that contain  
detectable errors are discarded. TLVs that are not recognized, but that also  
contain no basic format errors, are assumed to be validated and are stored  
for possible later retrieval by network management.  
Configuring LLDP using the CLI  
For information about configuring LLDP using the CLI, see "Configuring  
Ethernet port management features  
Autosensing and autonegotiation  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is an autosensing and  
autonegotiating device:  
The term autosense refers to the ability of a port to sense the speed of  
an attached device.  
The term autonegotiation refers to a standardized protocol (IEEE 802.3u)  
that exists between two IEEE 802.3u-capable devices. Autonegotiation  
lets the switch select the best of speed and duplex modes.  
Autosensing is used when the attached device is not capable of  
autonegotiation or is using a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible  
with the IEEE 802.3u standard. In this case, because it is not possible to  
sense the duplex mode of the attached device, the Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500 Series reverts to half-duplex mode.  
When autonegotiation-capable devices are attached to the Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500 Series, the ports negotiate down from 100 Mb/s speed and  
full-duplex mode until the attached device acknowledges a supported speed  
and duplex mode.  
Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements  
Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA) lets you customize  
the capabilities that you advertise. For example, if a port is capable of  
10/100/1000 full duplex operation, the port can be configured to only  
advertise 10 half-duplex capabilities.  
CANA lets you control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet  
switches as part of the autonegotiation process. In the current software  
releases, autonegotiation can either be enabled or disabled.  
When autonegotiation is disabled, the hardware is configured for a single  
(fixed) speed and duplex value. When autonegotiation is enabled, the  
advertisement made by the product is a constant value based upon all  
speed and duplex modes supported by the hardware.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
78 System configuration software features  
When autonegotiating, the switch selects the highest common operating  
mode supported between the switch and its link partner.  
In certain situations, it is useful to autonegotiate a specific speed and  
duplex value. In these situations, the switch can allow for attachment at an  
operating mode other than its highest supported value.  
For example, if the switch advertises only a 100 Mbps full-duplex capability  
on a specific link, the link goes active only if the neighboring device is also  
capable of autonegotiating a 100 Mbps full-duplex capability. This prevents  
mismatched speed and duplex modes if customers disable autonegotiation  
on the neighboring device.  
ATTENTION  
The CANA feature is available only for built-in 10/100 Ethernet ports and combo  
ports (not available for rear ports).  
You can only enable CANA through the CLI. When CANA is enabled on a port,  
autonegotiation status is displayed as Custom in the web-based management  
interface.  
High speed flow control  
The high speed flow control feature lets you control traffic and avoid  
congestion on the gigabit full-duplex link. If the receive port buffer becomes  
full, the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series issues a flow-control signal  
to the device at the other end of the link to suspend transmission. When  
the receive buffer is no longer full, the switch issues a signal to resume the  
transmission. You can choose Symmetric or Asymmetric flow control mode.  
High speed flow control cannot be configured unless you set Autonegotiation  
to Disabled on the port and the speed/duplex is at 1000/full.  
Two high speed flow control modes are available:  
Symmetric mode  
This mode lets both GBIC port and its link partner to send flow control  
pause frames to each other.  
When a pause frame is received (by either the GBIC port or its link partner),  
the port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified  
in the control frame or until a pause-release control frame is received. Both  
devices on the link must support this mode when it is selected.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Other features 79  
Asymmetric mode  
This mode lets the link partner send flow control pause frames to the  
GBIC port. When a pause frame is received, the receiving port suspends  
transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the control  
frame or until a pause-release control frame is received.  
In this mode, the GBIC port is disabled from transmitting pause frames to its  
link partner. Use this mode when the GBIC port is connected to a buffered  
repeater device.  
You can choose a high speed flow control mode using CLI commands. For  
more information about the commands see "Enabling flow control" (page  
Rate Limiting Configuration  
The Rate Limiting feature lets you configure the threshold limits for broadcast  
and multicast packets ingressing on a port for a given time interval. The  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series drops any packets received above the  
threshold value if the traffic ingressing on the port exceeds the threshold.  
The hardware restrictions on this platform do not allow you to determine if  
the traffic from a port is the cause of excess broadcast or multicast traffic.  
Consequently you cannot perform port specific actions such as disabling  
a port. You can generate a trap to detect the excess traffic or you can  
configure the switch to store a message in the system log when the traffic  
on the port exceeds the threshold value. This message in the system log  
conveys that some traffic to the switch is dropped.  
When the volume of either packet type is high, placing severe strain on  
the network (often referred to as a "storm"), you can set the forwarding  
rate of those packet types to not exceed a specified percentage of the total  
available bandwidth. The pps (Packets Per Second) value you set is a small  
amount of the maximum value of pps for the maximum available bandwidth  
that is 262143 pps.  
ATTENTION  
All Rate Limiting configuration settings are applied across the entire unit. You  
cannot set some ports in the unit to limit broadcast traffic with a value of X pps  
and some other ports in the same to limit multicast traffic with a value of Y pps.  
Other features  
RFCs  
For more information about networking concepts, protocols, and topologies,  
consult the following RFCs:  
RFC 1213 (MIB-II)  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
80 System configuration software features  
RFC 1493 (Bridge MIB)  
RFC 1573 (Interface MIB)  
RFC 1643 (Ethernet MIB)  
RFC 1757 (RMON)  
RFC 1271 (RMON)  
RFC 1157 (SNMP)  
Standards  
The following IEEE Standards also contain information germane to the  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series:  
IEEE 802.1D (Standard for Spanning Tree Protocol)  
IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)  
IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN Tagging)  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
81  
CLI Basics  
You can manage the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series with the following  
management tools:  
Device Manager (GUI)  
Web-based management system  
Command Line Interface (CLI)  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Command Line Interface (CLI) is  
a management tool that provides methods for configuring, managing, and  
monitoring the operational functions of the switch. You can access CLI  
through a console terminal directly connected to the switch Console port,  
remotely through a dial-up modem connection, in-band through a Telnet  
session. For a complete, alphabetical list of CLI commands, see Appendix  
You can use the CLI interactively, or you can load and execute CLI "scripts."  
CLI scripts are loaded in one of the following ways:  
Entering the configure network command  
Manually loading the script in the console menu  
Automatically loading the script at boot-up  
This chapter contains information about the following CLI topics:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
82 CLI Basics  
CLI command modes  
Most CLI commands are available only under a certain command mode.  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series has the following four command  
modes:  
User EXEC  
Privileged EXEC  
Global Configuration  
Interface Configuration  
The User EXEC mode is the default mode; it is also referred to as exec.  
This command mode is the initial mode of access on powering-up the  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series. In this command mode, the user can  
access only a subset of the total CLI commands; however, the commands  
in this mode are available while the user is in any of the other four modes.  
The commands in this mode are those you would generally need, such  
as ping and logout.  
Commands in the Privileged EXEC mode are available to all other modes  
but the User EXEC mode. The commands in this mode allow you to perform  
basic switch-level management tasks, such as downloading the software  
image, setting passwords, and booting the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
Series. The Privileged EXEC mode is also referred to as privExec mode.  
The Global Configuration mode and the Interface Configuration mode allow  
you to change the configuration of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
Changes made in these command modes are immediately applied to the  
switch configuration and saved to NVRAM.  
The Global Configuration commands allow you to set and display general  
configurations for the switch, such as the IP address, SNMP parameters,  
the Telnet access, and VLANs. The Global Configuration mode is also  
referred to as config mode.  
The Interface Configuration commands allow you to configure parameters  
for each port, such as speed and duplex mode. The Interface Configuration  
mode is also referred to as config-if mode.  
of the hierarchy of Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series CLI command  
modes.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CLI command modes 83  
Figure 23  
CLI command mode hierarchy  
You can see a specific value for each command mode at the prompt line,  
and you can use specific commands to enter or exit each command mode  
83)). Additionally, you can only enter command modes from specific modes  
and only exit to specific command modes.  
83) describes the command mode prompts and entrance/exit commands.  
Table 9  
Command mode prompts and entrance/exit commands  
Sample Prompt for  
Command  
mode  
the Ethernet  
Switch 2500  
Enter/exit command  
2500T>  
User EXEC  
(exec)  
Default mode, automatically  
enter  
logout or exit to quit to  
Main Menu  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
84 CLI Basics  
Sample Prompt for  
the Ethernet  
Switch 2500  
Command  
mode  
Enter/exit command  
2500T#  
Privileged EXEC  
(privExec)  
enable to enter from User  
EXEC mode  
logout or exit to quit to  
Main Menu  
2500T(config)#  
Global  
configure to enter from  
Configuration  
(config)  
Privileged EXEC mode  
end or exit to exit to  
Privileged EXEC mode;  
logout to quit to Main Menu  
2500T(config-if)# interface FastEthern  
et {<portnum>|all}  
Interface  
Configuration  
(config-if)  
to enter from Global  
Configuration mode  
logout to quit to Main Menu;  
end to exit to Privileged  
EXEC mode; exit to exit to  
Global Configuration mode  
The prompt displays the switch name, and the current CLI command mode.  
For example:  
User EXEC--2500T>  
Privileged EXEC--2500T#  
Global Configuration--2500T(config)#  
Interface Configuration--2500T(config-if)#  
See Appendix "Command List" (page 353) for a complete, alphabetical list  
of all CLI commands and where they are explained.  
The initial command mode in CLI depends on your access level when you  
logged into the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series:  
With no password protection, you can enter the CLI in userExec mode,  
and use the enable command to move to the privExec command mode.  
If you have logged into the CLI with read-only access, you enter the CLI  
in userExec mode and cannot access any other CLI command modes.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port numbering 85  
If you have logged into the CLI with read-write access, you enter the  
CLI in privExec mode and use the commands to move to the other  
command modes.  
Port numbering  
The port numbering for different versions of Ethernet switches are listed as  
follows:  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2526 has 24 10/100 Mb/s ports on the front, as  
well as two combo ports, which includes two GBIC or two copper ports  
at 10/100/1000Mbps. The switch also provides two 1000 Mb/s ports on  
the rear panel.  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2550 has 48 10/100 ports on the front, as well  
as two combo ports, which includes two GBIC or two copper ports at  
10/100/1000Mbps. The switch also provides two 1000 Mb/s ports on  
the rear panel.  
The CLI uses the variable <portlist> when a command specifies one or  
more ports for the command.  
Port numbering in Standalone Mode  
In a Standalone Mode, the port number variable is an integer between 1 and  
52 for Ethernet Routing Switch 2550 and 1 to 28 for Ethernet Routing Switch  
2526. You can use the <portlist> variable in the following formats:  
A single port number— a integer between 1 and 52.  
— Example: 7 means port 7  
A range of port numbers— a pair of port numbers between 1 and 52  
separated by a dash.  
— Example: 1-3 means ports 1, 2, and 3  
— Example: 5-24 means all ports from port 5 through port 24  
A list of port numbers and/or port ranges, separated by commas.  
— Example: 1,3,7 means ports 1, 3, and 7  
— Example: 1-3,9-11 means ports 1, 2, 3, 9, 10, and 11  
— Example: 1,3-5,9-11,15 means ports 1, 3, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, and 15  
none means no ports.  
all means all the ports on the standalone Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500 Series, including any GBIC ports.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
86 CLI Basics  
You can also use the unit/port convention with a standalone Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series as long as the unit number is 1.  
Accessing CLI  
You access the CLI using Telnet or through a direct connection to the switch  
from a terminal or personal computer (PC). You can use any terminal or PC  
with a terminal emulator as the CLI command station. Make sure that the  
terminal has the following features:  
9600 bits per second (b/s), 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, no flow  
control  
Serial terminal-emulation program such as Terminal or Hyperterm for  
Windows* 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows  
NT*  
Cable and connector to match the male DTE connector (DB-9) on the  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Console port, with the DCE/DTE  
switch on the switch management module set to DTE  
VT100 Arrows checked in the Terminal Preferences window under  
Terminal Options, and Block Cursor unchecked; VT-100/ANSI checked  
under Emulation  
To access CLI, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
When you access the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series, the  
following banner appears.  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series banner  
2
Press Ctrl+Y, and the CLI prompt appears.  
2500>  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic navigation 87  
The > sign at the end of the name of the switch indicates that the  
default CLI mode is User EXEC mode. See "CLI command modes"  
(page 82), to select the command mode you want to use (and are  
authorized to use).  
—End—  
Setting the system username and password  
You can set usernames and passwords for system access through the CLI,  
Telnet, and web-based management. For the standard software image, the  
default password for user RO is "user" and for user RW is "secure". For  
the secure software image, the default password for RO is "userpasswd"  
and for RW is "securepasswd". For more information, see Nortel Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series Security — Configuration and Management  
(NN47215-505).  
Getting help  
When you navigate through the CLI, online Help is available at all levels.  
Entering a portion of the command, space, and a question mark (?) at the  
prompt results in a list of all options for that command.  
See "help command" (page 89) for more information about specific types  
of Help.  
Basic navigation  
This section discusses basic navigation around the CLI and between  
the command modes. As you see, the CLI incorporates various shortcut  
commands and keystrokes to simplify its use. This section contains  
information about the following topics:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
88 CLI Basics  
General navigation commands  
When you enter "?" at any point in the CLI session, the system retrieves  
help information for whatever portion of the command you entered thus far.  
See "help command" (page 89) for more information.  
The system records the last command in a CLI session. However, the last  
command is not saved across reboots.  
Add the word no to the beginning of most CLI configuration commands to  
clear or remove the parameters of the actual command. For example, when  
you enter the command ip address 192.32.154.126, you set the IP  
address. However, when you enter no ip address, the system returns  
the IP address to zero. See Appendix "Command List" (page 353) for an  
alphabetical list of no commands.  
Add the word default to the beginning of most CLI configuration  
commands to set the parameters of the command to the factory default  
values. See Appendix "Command List" (page 353) for an alphabetical list of  
default commands.  
When you enter a portion of the command and press the [Tab] key, the  
system finds the first unambiguous match of a command and displays that  
command. For example, if you enter down+[Tab], the system displays  
download.  
Keystroke navigation  
You can change the location of the cursor using the key combinations  
shown in the following table.  
Table 10  
Keystroke navigation  
Key combination  
Ctrl+A  
Function  
Start of line  
Ctrl+B  
Back 1 character  
Abort command  
Ctrl+C  
Ctrl+D  
Delete the character indicated by the cursor  
End of line  
Ctrl+E  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic navigation 89  
Key combination  
Ctrl+F  
Function  
Forward 1 character  
Ctrl+H  
Delete character left of cursor (Backspace key)  
Command/parameter completion  
Redisplay line  
Tab  
Ctrl+K and Ctrl+R  
Ctrl+N or Down arrow Next history command  
Previous history command  
Transpose characters  
Ctrl+P or Up arrow  
Ctrl+T  
Ctrl+U  
Delete entire line  
Ctrl+W  
Delete word left of cursor  
Delete all characters to left of cursor  
Ctrl+X  
Ctrl+z  
Exit Global Configuration mode (to Privileged EXEC  
mode)  
?
Context-sensitive help  
Esc+C and Esc+U  
Esc+l  
Capitalize character at cursor  
Change character at cursor to lowercase  
Move back 1 word  
Esc+B  
Esc+D  
Delete 1 word to the right  
Move 1 word forward  
Esc+F  
help command  
The help command is in all command modes and displays a brief message  
about using the CLI help system. The syntax for the help command is:  
help  
The help command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode.  
The help command has no parameters or variables.  
Figure 24 "help command output" (page 90) shows the output from the  
help command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
90 CLI Basics  
Figure 24  
help command output  
no command  
The no command is always used as a prefix to a configuration command,  
and it negates the action performed by that command. The effect of the  
no command is to remove or to clear the configuration controlled by the  
specified command. Various no commands are in the config and config-if  
command modes.  
See Appendix "Command List" (page 353) for an alphabetical listing of all  
no commands.  
ATTENTION  
Not all configuration commands support the no prefix command.  
default command  
The default command is always used as a prefix to a configuration  
command, and it restores the configuration parameters to default values.  
The default values are specified by each command.  
See Appendix A for an alphabetical listing of all default commands.  
ATTENTION  
Not all commands support the default prefix command.  
logout command  
The logout command logs you out of the CLI session. The syntax for the  
logout command is:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic navigation 91  
logout  
The logout command is in all command modes.  
The logout command has no parameters or variables.  
enable command  
The enable command changes the command mode from User EXEC to  
Privileged Exec mode. The syntax for the enable command is:  
enable  
The enable command is executed in the User Exec command mode.  
The enable command has no parameters or variables.  
configure command  
The configure command moves you to the Global Configuration (config)  
command mode and identifies the source for the configuration commands.  
The syntax for the configure command is:  
configure {terminal|network}  
The configure command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command  
mode.  
91) describes the parameters and variables for the configure command.  
Table 11  
configure command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
Specifies the source for the configuration commands for the  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series:  
terminal | network  
terminal—a you to enter Global Configuration command  
mode to enter configuration commands network—lets you  
set up parameters for auto-loading a script at boot-up or for  
loading and executing a script immediately  
interface command  
The interface command moves you to the Interface Configuration  
(config-if) command mode. The syntax for the interface command is:  
interface FastEthernet <portlist>  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
92 CLI Basics  
The interface command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
the parameters and variables for the interface command.  
Table 12  
interface command parameters and variables  
Parameters  
Description  
and variables  
<portlist>  
Specifies the portlist you want to be affected by all the  
commands issued in the config-if command mode.  
disable command  
The disable command returns you to the User EXEC (exec) command  
mode. The syntax for the disable command is:  
disable  
The disable command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command  
mode.  
The disable command has no parameters or variables.  
end command  
The end command moves you to the priv Exec mode from either the Global  
Configuration (config) mode or the Interface Configuration (config-if) mode.  
The syntax for the end command is:  
end  
The end command has no parameters or variables.  
exit command  
The exit command moves you around the command modes:  
In User EXEC (exec) and Privileged EXEC (privExec) command modes,  
exit lets you quit the CLI session.  
In Global Configuration (config) mode, exit moves you back to the  
privExec command mode.  
In Interface Configuration (config-if) command mode, exit moves you  
back to the Global Configuration command mode.  
The syntax for the exit command is:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic navigation 93  
exit  
The exit command has no parameters or variables.  
reload command  
The reload command provides you with a configuration rollback  
mechanism to prevent loss of connectivity to a switch, typically for remote  
configurations. The reload command lets you temporarily disable the  
autosave feature for a specified time period (1 to 60 minutes), allowing you  
to make a number of configuration changes on remote switches without  
affecting the current saved configuration.  
During the interval in which the autosave feature is disabled by the reload  
command, you must use the copy config nvram, write memory, or  
save config command to force a manual save of your configurations.  
Once the reload timer expires, the switch reloads the last saved  
configuration. To abort the switch reload before the timer expires, you must  
enter the reload cancel command.  
The reload command provides you with a safeguard against any  
misconfigurations when you perform dynamic configuration changes on  
a remote switch.  
The following example describes how you can use the reload command  
to prevent connectivity loss to a remote switch.  
Step Action  
1
Enter the CLI command reload force 30. This instructs the  
switch to reboot in 30 minutes, loading the configuration from  
NVRAM.  
During this 30-minute period, autosave of the configuration to  
NVRAM is disabled.  
2
3
4
5
Execute dynamic switch configuration commands, which take effect  
immediately. These configurations are not saved to NVRAM.  
If the configurations cause no problems and switch connectivity is  
maintained, you can perform the following:  
Save the current running configuration using the copy config  
nvram, write memory, or save config command.  
Since the new configuration is working properly, cancel the reload  
using the reload cancel command.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
94 CLI Basics  
If you make an error when performing configurations in Step 2 that results in  
the loss of switch connectivity (for example, an error in the IP address mask,  
MLT configuration, or VLAN trunking), the reload command provides you  
with a safeguard: when the reload timer expires, the switch reboots to the  
last saved configuration, and connectivity is re-established. Therefore, you  
do not have to travel to the remote site to reconfigure the switch.  
Initiate the reload command before you start the switch configuration  
commands. Once you initiate the command in the CLI, the following  
message appears:  
Reload (y/n) ?  
Enter yes at this prompt to set the switch reload.  
The following warning message then appears:  
Warning the switch has been set to reload in <xx> minutes.  
Current configuration has NOT been saved. Configuration must  
be explicitly saved.  
Once the reload timer expires, the switch resets, reloads the last saved  
configuration, and re-enables the autosave feature.  
The syntax for the reload command is:  
reload [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel]  
describes the parameters and variables for the interface command.  
Table 13  
reload command parameters and variables  
Parameters  
Description  
and variables  
force  
Instructs the switch to skip the reload confirmation prompt.  
minutes-to-wait  
<1-60>]  
Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the switch  
reloads itself. The default wait time is set at 10 minutes.  
cancel  
Aborts all scheduled switch reloads  
The reload command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode.  
shutdown command  
The shutdown command lets you safely shut down and power off the  
switch. Once the shutdown command is initiated, the switch saves the  
current configuration and instructs users to power off the switch within the  
specified time period (1 to 60 minutes); otherwise, the switch performs a  
reset.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic navigation 95  
When the shutdown command is initiated in the CLI, the following message  
appears:  
Shutdown (y/n) ?  
Enter y at this prompt to shut down the switch.  
The following warning message then appears:  
Warning the switch/stack has been set to reboot in <xx>  
minutes. Current configuration has been saved, no further  
configuration changes can be saved until reboot occurs or  
’shutdown cancel’ command is issued.  
The syntax for shutdown command is:  
shutdown [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel]  
Once the shutdown command is initiated, all existing and subsequent  
Console Interface sessions display the following message:  
Stack will reset in <xxxx> seconds.  
While existing CLI sessions do not receive a warning message, all  
subsequent CLI sessions display the following message:  
The shutdown process is in progress. It is safe to poweroff  
the stack. Configuration changes will not be saved.  
Shutdown has blocked the flash. Autoreset in <xxxx> seconds.  
ATTENTION  
You can disable switch ports that are trunk members, if you choose to disable  
them one by one. If you choose to disable all ports of the unit or stack, the  
changes cannot have effect on the ports belonging to MLTs.  
Neither web-based management nor Device Manager receive any shutdown  
warning messages.  
95) describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown command.  
Table 14  
shutdown command parameters and variables  
Parameters  
Description  
and variables  
cancel  
Aborts all scheduled switch shutdowns  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
96 CLI Basics  
Parameters  
and variables  
Description  
force  
Instructs the switch to skip the shutdown confirmation  
prompt.  
minutes-to-wait  
<1-80>  
Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the  
switch resets itself. The default wait time is set at 10  
minutes.  
ATTENTION  
Any configurations or login performed on the switch after the shutdown command  
is initiated are not saved to NVRAM and are lost after the reset.  
The shutdown command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command  
mode.  
Managing basic system information  
This section shows you how to view basic system information such as  
the current software version. This section contains information about the  
following topics:  
show sys-info command  
The show sys-info command displays the current system characteristics.  
The syntax for the show sys-info command is:  
show sys-info  
The show sys-info command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
The show sys-info command has no parameters or variables.  
output from the show sys-info command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Managing basic system information 97  
Figure 25  
show sys-info command output  
To change the system contact, name, or location, see the snmp-server  
command (see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security —  
Configuration and Management (NN47215-505)).  
show tech command  
The show tech command displays detailed system information. The  
syntax for the show tech command is:  
show tech  
The show tech command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command  
mode. The show tech command has no parameters or variables.  
from the show tech command.  
Figure 26  
show tech command output  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
98 CLI Basics  
Managing MAC address forwarding database table  
This section describes the commands to view the contents of the MAC  
address forwarding database table, as well as setting the age-out time for  
the addresses. The following topics are covered:  
show mac-address-table command  
The show mac-address-table command displays the current contents  
of the MAC address forwarding database table. The syntax for the show  
mac-address-table command is:  
show mac-address-table [vid <1-4094>] [aging-time] [port  
<LINE>][address <H.H.H> {include | exclude <pattern>}]  
The show mac-address-table command is executed in the Privileged  
EXEC command mode.  
(page 98) describes the parameters and variables for the show  
mac-address-table command.  
Table 15  
show mac-address-table command parameters and variables  
Parameters  
Description  
and variables  
vid <1-4094>  
Enter the number of the VLAN you want to display the  
forwarding database.  
Default is to display the management VLAN’s database.  
aging-time  
Displays the time in seconds after which an unused  
entry is removed from the forwarding database.  
port <LINE>  
List of ports.  
address <H.H.H>  
Displays a specific MAC address if it exists in the  
database. Enter the MAC address you want displayed.  
Lets you filter the results of the command by printing  
only those entries in the address table that include or  
exclude a given pattern. The value for <pattern>  
must be a sequence of 1 to 6 bytes in hex, separated  
by dashes.  
include | exclude  
<pattern>  
for example: show mac-address-table port  
1/1-5 address include 00-0E-45-23  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Managing MAC address forwarding database table 99  
sample output from the show mac-address-table command.  
Figure 27  
show mac-address-table command output  
mac-address-table aging-time command  
The mac-address-table aging-time command sets the time  
that the switch retains unseen MAC addresses. The syntax for the  
mac-address-table aging-time command is:  
mac-address-table aging-time <time>  
The mac-address-table aging-time command is executed in the  
Global Configuraion command mode.  
variables" (page 99) describes the parameters and variables for the  
mac-address-table aging-time command.  
Table 16  
mac-address-table aging-time command parameters and variables  
Parameters  
and  
Description  
variables  
time  
Enter the aging time in seconds that you want for MAC  
addresses before they are flushed.  
default mac-address-table aging-time command  
The default mac-address-table aging-time command sets the  
time that the switch retains unseen MAC addresses to 300 seconds. The  
syntax for the default mac-address-table aging-time command  
is:  
default mac-address aging-time  
The default mac-address-table aging-time command is executed  
in the Global Configuration command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
100 CLI Basics  
The default mac-address-table aging-time command has no  
parameters or variables.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
Getting Started with Device Manager  
The Java Device Manager (JDM) software is a Graphical User Interface  
(GUI) that lets you manage the switch. JDM (also referred to as Device  
Manager) provides options found in other management tools such as  
management of VLANs and MultiLink Trunks, and displaying and printing  
of statistics in graph format.  
To use Device Manager, you must have network connectivity to a  
management station running Device Manager on one of the supported  
platforms. You must also assign an IP address to the switch.  
This chapter contains information on the following topics:  
Installing Device Manager  
The JDM software is provided on the device software CD as a self-extracting  
executable file, and is also available from the Nortel web site. This chapter  
provides instructions for installing the JDM software in a Windows*, UNIX*,  
or Linux* environment.  
The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) is bundled with the JDM software and  
does not require a separate installation.  
For details on installing Device Manager, see the following sections:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
102 Getting Started with Device Manager  
JDM installation precautions  
The following warnings apply to Device Manager on all operating  
environments:  
The JDM and Ethernet Routing Switch software versions must match for  
the correct dialog boxes and information to be shown and accessible.  
Please see the Release Notes for a complete compatibility list.  
If you want to use JDM to support multiple Nortel switches in your  
network, ensure that the JDM version you use supports each version of  
software running on each Nortel device in your network.  
Prior to upgrading JDM, either uninstall your previous version of the  
Device Manager software, or install the new software to a different  
directory. (You can have multiple versions of Device Manager stored on  
your Windows, UNIX, or Linux machine, provided that each version  
is stored in a separate directory.)  
ATTENTION  
Do not install the JDM to a directory where a previous version of Device  
Manager software already exists.  
JDM saves the IP addresses that are visited to a settings file. A JDM  
uninstall operation does not remove this settings file.  
— In a Windows environment, the settings file is dm.xml, and is created  
in the jdm folder, under window user profile directory.  
— In a UNIX environment, the settings file is ~/.jdm/dm.xml.  
— In a Linux environment, the settings file is ~/.jdm/dm.xml.  
The dm.xml file containing IP addresses visited from a previous JDM.  
Installing the Device Manager software  
Device Manager software can be installed in Windows, UNIX, or Linux  
environment. The following sections provide information on the system  
requirements and installation procedures to install Device Manager software  
in Windows, UNIX, and Linux environments.  
Installing JDM on Windows  
This section includes the following topics:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installing JDM on Windows 103  
Windows minimum requirements  
The minimum system requirements for installing JDM on Microsoft*Windows  
NT*, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows 2003, or Windows Vista are:  
350 MHz or higher Pentium processor  
512 MB DRAM  
400 MB space on hard drive  
Removing previous versions of JDM on Windows  
ATTENTION  
Removing previous versions of JDM is an optional process. Multiple versions of  
JDM can exist on one system, as long as each version is in a separate location.  
If you decide to allow previous versions of JDM to remain, then you must choose  
a different folder to use during the installation process.  
Remove existing versions of Device Manager software by using the Uninstall  
DM option that was created in the Windows Start menu during installation.  
For example, to remove Device Manager from a Windows XP system using  
the default program group, choose the following option from the Windows  
Start menu: All Programs>Nortel>Java Device Manager>Uninstall DM.  
If no program group was added to the Windows Start menu during  
installation, then complete the following steps to remove existing Device  
Manager software:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Navigate to the folder where the JDM software is installed.  
Open the UninstallerData sub-folder.  
Run the following file: Uninstall Java Device Manager.exe.  
ATTENTION  
If more than one version of Device Manager software is installed,  
ensure you select the correct software to uninstall.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
104 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Installing JDM on Windows from the CD  
To access the JDM software from the installation CD:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Close all programs.  
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
From the Windows Start menu, choose Run.  
The Run dialog box appears.  
4
5
Use Browse to navigate to the drive where the CD-ROM is located.  
On the CD-ROM drive, locate the \Windows\Device Manager  
subdirectory.  
6
Double-click the jdm_xxxx.exe file.  
ATTENTION  
In the file name, xxxx represents the current version of the JDM software.  
—End—  
Installing JDM on Windows from the web  
To obtain the JDM software from the Nortel web site, use the following  
procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Go to the following URL:  
Select the software support page for your product.  
The software page appears.  
Click the Java Device Manager version you want.  
The Software Detail Information page appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing JDM on Windows 105  
4
Download the JDM software for Windows to a desired directory on  
your system. The software download is a self-extracting .exe file.  
Once the file transfer is complete, continue with step 5.  
Close all programs.  
5
6
Navigate to the directory on your system where you downloaded  
the JDM Software.  
7
Double-click the jdm_xxxx.exe file.  
ATTENTION  
In the file name, xxxx represents the current version of the JDM software.  
—End—  
Executing the JDM installation software on Windows  
An install screen appears, followed by a Nortel dialog box. When the  
InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box appears you are ready to install  
the JDM.  
Figure 28  
InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
106 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Step Action  
1
Click Next to begin the installation process.  
The License Agreement dialog box appears.  
2
Click I accept the terms of the License Agreement .  
License Agreement dialog box  
3
Click Next.  
The Choose Install Set dialog box appears.  
Choose Install Set dialog box  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing JDM on Windows 107  
4
Do one of the following:  
Select Typical installation to install the common set features,  
as well as online help.  
Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install  
(recommended for those with limited disk space).  
Select Help to install only the online help.  
Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to  
installation.  
5
Click Next.  
If you did not select Custom installation in step 4, then the Choose  
Install Folder dialog box appears. Continue with step 8.  
If you selected Custom installation in step 4, then the Feature Sets  
dialog box appears.  
Feature Sets dialog box  
6
7
Select which features to install from the feature sets list.  
Click Next.  
The Choose Install Folder dialog box appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
108 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Choose Install Folder dialog box  
8
9
Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM, or  
click Choose to select a different storage path.  
ATTENTION  
If Device Manager is already installed on your computer, you must choose  
a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version.  
Click Next.  
The Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box appears.  
Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing JDM on Windows 109  
10  
11  
Select the desired shortcut path from the list provided.  
Click Next.  
The Pre-Installation Summary dialog box appears. A summary of  
the choices you have made is displayed for confirmation.  
Pre-Installation Summary dialog box  
12  
13  
Verify the folder, shortcut, and disk space required to install the  
software. If necessary, click Previous to return to the appropriate  
dialog box and make changes.  
Click Install.  
The installation process begins. When the installation is complete,  
the Install Complete dialog box appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Install Complete dialog box  
14  
Click Done to exit the installation.  
JDM is now installed on your machine.  
—End—  
Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux  
ATTENTION  
JDM installation procedures are standardized across all platforms. In addition,  
the required Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.5 is part of the JDM  
installation package and does not require a separate installation. The bundled  
JRE is used with this JDM only, and does not affect other Java applications on  
the same system.  
UNIX and Linux systems are case-sensitive. Use lower-case to specify file  
names, and check to ensure that directories are entered correctly.  
This section includes the following topics:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux 111  
Minimum requirements  
JDM supports two UNIX platforms and one Linux platform:  
a UNIX SPARC* workstation running the Sun* Solaris* 2.7, 2.8, 2.1.0.  
(or higher)  
a PC running Linux Kernel 2.2 operating system (or higher)  
The minimum system requirements for installing JDM on any UNIX or Linux  
platform are:  
4 MB available in a temporary directory  
400 MB free in the directory where you want to install the JDM software  
512 MB DRAM  
Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD  
To install the JDM software to a Solaris environment from the CD, use the  
following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Close all programs.  
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
Navigate to the Solaris/JDM subdirectory on the software CD.  
Run the dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh file.  
—End—  
Installing JDM on Linux from the CD  
To install the Device Manager software to a Linux environment from the CD,  
use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Close all programs.  
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
Navigate to the Linux/JDM subdirectory on the software CD.  
Run the jdm_xxxx_linux.sh file.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
112 Getting Started with Device Manager  
—End—  
Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web  
To install the JDM software to a UNIX (Solaris) environment from the web,  
use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Go to the following URL:  
Select the software support page for your product.  
The software page appears.  
Click the Java Device Manager version you want.  
The Software Detail Information page appears.  
Download the JDM software for your operating environment to a  
desired directory on your system. The software download is a  
self-extracting .sh file.  
Once the file transfer is complete, continue with the next step.  
Close all programs.  
5
6
Navigate to the directory on your system where you loaded the  
JDM software.  
7
Make the installation file executable.  
For the Solaris environment, make the file executable by entering:  
chmod a+x dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh  
For the Linux environment, make the file executable by entering:  
chmod a+x jdm_xxxx_linux.sh  
8
Run the installation file.  
For the Solaris environment, run the dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh file.  
For the Linux environment, run the jdm_xxxx_linux.sh file.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux 113  
Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux  
An install screen appears, followed by a Nortel dialog box. When the  
InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box appears, you are ready to begin  
the JDM installation.  
Figure 29  
InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box  
Step Action  
1
Click Next the installation process.  
The License Agreement dialog box appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
114 Getting Started with Device Manager  
License Agreement dialog box  
2
3
Click I accept the terms of the License Agreement.  
Click Next.  
The Choose Install Set dialog box appears.  
Choose Install Set dialog box  
4
Do one of the following:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux 115  
Select Typical installation to install the common set features,  
as well as online help.  
Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install  
(recommended for those with limited disk space).  
Select Help to install only the online help.  
Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to  
installation.  
5
Click Next.  
If you did not select Custom installation in step 4, then the Choose  
Install Folder dialog box appears. See step 8.  
If you selected Custom installation in step 4, then the Feature Sets  
dialog box appears.  
Feature Sets dialog box  
6
7
Select which features to install from the feature sets list.  
Click Next.  
The Choose Install Folder dialog box appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Choose Install Folder dialog box  
8
9
Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM, or  
click Choose to select a storage path.  
ATTENTION  
If Device Manager is already installed on your computer, you must choose  
a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version.  
Click Next.  
The Pre-Installation Summary dialog box appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux 117  
Pre-Installation Summary dialog box  
10  
11  
Verify the folder and disk space required to install the software. If  
necessary, click Previous to return to the appropriate dialog box  
and make changes.  
Click Install.  
The installation process begins.  
Installing Java Device Manager dialog box  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118 Getting Started with Device Manager  
When the installation is complete, the Install Complete dialog box  
appears.  
Install Complete dialog box  
12  
Click Done to exit the installation.  
JDM is now installed on your machine.  
—End—  
Removing JDM in Unix or Linux environments  
In a UNIX or Linux environment, complete the following steps to remove  
the existing JDM software:  
Step Action  
1
Navigate to the directory where the JDM software is installed (for  
example /JDM).  
2
3
Open the UninstallerData sub-directory.  
Run the following file: Uninstall_Java_Device_Manager.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Starting Device Manager 119  
Device Manager basics  
This section describes basic procedures for using the Device Manager  
software. The section includes information on the following topics:  
Starting Device Manager  
Do one of the following, depending upon your operating system  
environment:  
In a Microsoft* Windows* environment, choose All Programs > Nortel  
> Java Device Manager > DM from the Windows Start menu.  
In a UNIX environment, verify that the Device Manager installation  
directory is in your search path; then enter:  
./JDM  
The initial Device Manager window appears.  
ATTENTION  
On startup, the Device Manager performs a DNS lookup for the machine on which  
it is running. If the DNS lookup is slow or fails, the initial Device Manager window  
may take up to 30 seconds to open.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
120 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Figure 30  
Device Manager window  
Setting the Device Manager properties  
The Device Manager communicates with the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
Series using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The software  
is shipped with default values set for important communication parameters,  
such as the polling interval, timeout, and retry count. You can set the  
parameters before you open a device to manage.  
To set the Device Manager properties, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
Choose Device > Properties >Current.  
The Default Properties dialog box appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting the Device Manager properties 121  
Figure 31  
Default Properties dialog box  
2
3
Type information and select check boxes.  
Click OK.  
—End—  
The following table describes the Properties dialog box fields.  
Table 17  
Properties dialog box fields  
Area  
Field  
Description  
SNMP  
Retry Count  
Number of times Device Manager sends the same  
polling request if a response is not returned to Device  
Manager.  
You may want to set this field to three or four.  
Timeout  
Length of each retry of each polling waiting period.  
When you access the device through a slow link, you  
may want to increase the timeout interval and then  
change the Retransmission Strategy to superlinear.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
122 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Area  
Field  
Description  
Trace  
The trace field is used to enable and disable SNMP  
tracing. When Trace is selected, SNMP protocol  
data units (PDUs) are displayed in the Device > Log  
dialog box.  
Listen for Traps  
Max Traps in Log  
Trap Port  
When selected (enabled), Device Manager listens  
for traps from the device.  
The specified number of traps that may exist in the  
trap log. The default is 500.  
Specifies the UDP port that Device Manager listens  
to receive SNMP traps.  
Listen for Syslogs  
When selected (enabled), Device Manager listens to  
the syslog.  
Confirm row deletion A dialog box displays when checked, before deleting  
a row.  
Default Read  
Community  
Specifies the default read community.  
Default Write  
Community  
Specifies the default write community.  
Polling  
Status Interval  
Interval at which status information is gathered  
(default is 20 seconds).  
Hotswap Detect  
every:  
The interval at which Device Manager detects the  
module information. The default is 1 interval.  
Enable  
Enables (true) or disables (false) periodic polling of  
the device for updated status. If polling is disabled,  
the chassis status is updated only when you click  
Refresh on the Chassis tab.  
Web Management  
Application Control  
Http Port  
Default port is 80. This field specifies the HTTP port  
for the application. To access the Device Home Page  
using the Web, ensure that the HTTP Port attribute  
matches the switch configuration. If you change the  
port number, the system prompts you with a warning  
message.  
Application launch  
with ring tone  
Enabled by default, you can modify this field only  
when configuring the Device Manager default  
properties. You cannot modify this field when  
configuring the per device properties.  
Save SNMPv3  
Devices to Open  
Last  
Disabled by default, if you enable this field you are  
prompted with a security warning message because  
any user can access the device without entering the  
SNMPv3 security criteria if this feature is enabled.  
You can modify this field only when configuring the  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Opening a device 123  
Area  
Field  
Description  
Device Manager default properties. You cannot  
modify this field when configuring the per device  
properties.  
Application Launch Telnet  
from JDM  
Default Telnet is the one that comes with the  
operating system. To define a specific Telnet, select  
User-Defined and specify the Telnet path and  
parameters.  
SSH  
Default SSH is the one bundled with in the JDM.  
To define a specific SSH, select User-Defined and  
specify the SSH client path and parameters.  
Opening a device  
Opening a device displays the device view, a picture of the device. To  
open the device view, you must enter community strings that determine the  
access level granted to the device.  
default access community strings for the Device Manager software.  
Table 18  
SNMP community string default values  
Access level  
Read-only  
Description  
public  
Read/write  
private  
To display the device view, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
Do one of the following:  
Choose Device > Open.  
Choose Device > Open Last by SNMPv1/v2, and select an  
IP address from the list.  
For previously-opened SNMPv3-enabled devices, choose  
Device > Open Last by SNMPv3, and select an IP address  
from the list.  
Click the folder icon in the Device Manager window.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
124 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Press Ctrl+O.  
The Open Device dialog box appears.  
Figure 32  
Open Device dialog box  
The following table describes the Open Device dialog box fields.  
Table 19  
Open Device dialog box fields  
Field  
Description  
Device Name  
Either an IP address or a DNS name for  
the device, entered by the user.  
SNMPv1/ Read Communi SNMP read community string for the  
SNMPv2 ty  
device. Default is public (displayed as  
******). The entry is case-sensitive.  
c
Write Communi SNMP write community string for the  
ty  
device. Default is private (displayed as  
*******).The entry is case-sensitive.  
Use default  
community  
strings in  
When selected, the Device Manager uses  
the default community string. Set the  
default community strings in Device >  
Properties.  
properties  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Opening a device 125  
Field  
Description  
v3 Enabled  
When selected (enabled), Open Device  
dialog box displays SNMPv3 options.  
SNMPv3  
User Name  
Indicates the name of the user.  
Context Name  
Context Name string (Does not apply to  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series).  
Authentication  
Protocol  
Identifies the authentication protocol  
used.  
Authentication  
Password  
Specifies the current authentication  
password.  
Privacy Protocol Identifies the privacy protocol.  
Privacy Passwo Specifies the current privacy password.  
rd  
ATTENTION  
Not all information is required for connection to a switch. If the v3 Enabled  
check box is not selected, only a Device Name, Read Community,  
and Write Community value are needed. If the v3 Enabled check box  
is not selected, only a Device Name, Read Community, and Write  
Community value are needed. If you enable Use default community  
strings in properties, the Device Manager uses the default values  
specified in the device properties for Read Community, and Write  
Community. If v3 Enabled is selected, then Device Name, User Name,  
Authentication Protocol, Authentication Password, Privacy Protocol,  
and Privacy Password are required. If v3 Enabled is selected, then  
Device Name, User Name, Authentication Protocol, Authentication  
Password, Privacy Protocol, and Privacy Password are required.  
Some devices require a value in Context Name.  
2
3
In the Device Name text box, type the DNS name or IP address  
of the device.  
In the Read Community and Write Community text boxes, type the  
appropriate community strings.  
ATTENTION  
To gain read/write access to a device in Device Manager, you must enter  
the read/write community string for both the Read Community and Write  
Community strings.  
4
Click Open.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
126 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Device Manager automatically determines what version of software  
the selected device is running and displays the appropriate Device  
Manager dialog boxes.  
The Device Manager window appears, showing a picture of the  
device that represents the physical features of the device.  
Device view  
—End—  
Device Manager window  
The Device Manager window has the following parts:  
Menu bar  
Toolbar  
Device view  
Status bar  
Figure 33  
Parts of the Device Manager window  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Device Manager window 127  
Menu bar  
Use the menu bar to set up and operate the Device Manager  
commands.  
Table 20  
Menu bar commands  
Command  
Description  
Device  
Opens the Open Device dialog box. You can also:  
Set the Properties used during a Device Manager session  
Refresh the status of the currently viewed device  
Rediscover device  
Telnet to a device  
Open an SSH connection to a device  
View SNMP traps that the Device Manager receives  
View Syslogs  
View SNMP trace logs  
Edit  
Opens the edit dialog boxes for selected objects in the device  
view. This command opens dialog boxes for managing files,  
running diagnostic tests and configuring data for selected  
objects. This command also lets you set security parameters,  
SNTP, and SNMP v3 related configurations.  
Graph  
VLAN  
Opens statistics and graphing dialog boxes for the selected  
object.  
Opens dialog boxes for managing VLANs, Spanning Tree Group  
(STG), RSTP, MSTP, Multi-Link Trunks, and Link Aggregation  
Control Protocol (LACP).  
QoS  
Opens configuration dialog boxes for Quality of Service (QoS)  
and DSCP.  
RMON  
Actions  
Opens RMON configuration and monitoring dialog boxes.  
Provides quick access to the Web Management Software Home  
page.  
Help  
Opens online Help topics for Device Manager and provides a  
legend for the port colors in the device view.  
Toolbar  
The toolbar contains buttons that provide quick access to commonly used  
commands and some additional actions.  
Table 21 "Toolbar buttons" (page 128) describes the toolbar buttons.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
128 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Table 21  
Toolbar buttons  
Button  
Name  
Description  
Menu bar equivalent  
Open  
Device  
Opens the Open Device dialog Device > Open  
box.  
Refresh  
Device  
Status  
Refreshes the device view  
information.  
Device > Refresh  
Status  
Telnet  
Opens a Telnet session.  
Device > Telnet  
SSH  
Opens an SSH session.  
Opens the trap log.  
Device > SSH  
Connection  
Trap Log  
Device > Trap Log  
Help  
Opens online Help in a Web  
browser.  
Help > Device  
Edit  
Selected  
Displays configuration data for Edit > Port  
the selected chassis object.  
Graph  
Selected  
Opens statistics and graphing  
dialog boxes for the selected  
object.  
Graph > Port  
Graph > Chassis  
Home  
Page  
Opens the Web Management  
Software Home Page.  
Actions > Open Home  
Page  
Alarm  
Manager  
Opens the Rmon Alarm  
Manager.  
Rmon > Alarm  
Manager  
Device view  
The device view lets you determine at a glance the operating status of the  
various units and ports in your hardware configuration. You can also use the  
device view to perform management tasks on specific objects.  
Selecting objects  
The types of objects contained in the device view are:  
A standalone switch (called a unit in the menus and dialog boxes)  
A port (including the SFP GBIC port)  
the device view.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Device Manager window 129  
Figure 34  
Objects in the device view  
Selecting a single object  
To select a single object:  
Click the edge of the object.  
The object is outlined in yellow, indicating that it is selected. Subsequent  
activities in Device Manager refer to the selected object.  
Selecting multiple objects  
For instructions on selecting multiple objects (such as ports or switches),  
see the following table:  
Table 22  
Selecting multiple objects  
Object to be selected  
Action  
To select a block of contiguous ports  
To select all ports  
Drag to select the group of ports  
Choose Edit > Select > Ports  
Viewing information about a GBIC port  
To view information about a GBIC port, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the GBIC.  
Choose Edit > Port.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
130 Getting Started with Device Manager  
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed .  
The Interface tab describes the GBIC installed in the switch.  
Figure 35  
Interface tab  
LEDs and ports  
The color of LEDs in the device view is the same as the colors of the LEDs  
on the physical switch. However, the device view does not show blinking  
activity of the LEDs.  
For a full description of the LEDs for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
The ports on the device view are color coded to show port status.  
Table 23 "Port color codes" (page 131) describes the status assigned to  
each color.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Device Manager window 131  
Table 23  
Port color codes  
Color  
Green  
Red  
Description  
Port is operating.  
Port has been manually disabled.  
Port has no link.  
Orange  
In addition, the Help menu provides a legend that identifies the port colors  
and their meanings, as shown in Figure 36 "Color port legend" (page 131).  
ATTENTION  
The additional colors displayed in the Device Manager legend are not applicable  
to the Ethernet Routing Swith 2500 Series.  
Figure 36  
Color port legend  
Shortcut menus  
Each object in the device view has a shortcut menu that appears when  
you right-click a selected object. The switch unit shortcut menu provides  
access to basic hardware information about the switch and to the graphing  
dialog boxes for the switch.  
Figure 37  
Switch unit shortcut menu  
Switch unit shortcut menu command on the switch unit shortcut menu.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
132 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Table 24  
Switch unit shortcut menu command  
Command  
Description  
Edit  
Opens a dialog box that provides basic hardware information  
about the switch and lets you set the Rate Limiting configuration  
for the switch unit.  
Show Port  
Tooltip  
Indicates that the tooltip function is active. When unchecked,  
the tooltip function is disabled.  
A Tooltip is a descriptive text box that appears when the mouse  
pointer is held over a port.  
Refresh Port  
Tooltip  
Refreshes the tooltip information.  
Refresh PoE  
Status  
Refreshes the status for PoE ports.  
The port shortcut menu provides a faster path for editing and graphing a  
single port; however, you can access the same options using the menu  
bar or the toolbar.  
Figure 38  
Port shortcut menu  
commands on the port shortcut menu.  
Table 25  
Port shortcut menu commands  
Command  
Description  
Edit  
Opens a dialog box that lets you set operating  
parameters for the port.  
Graph  
Opens a dialog box that displays statistics for the port  
and lets you display the statistics as a graph.  
Enable  
Disable  
Administratively brings a port up.  
Administratively shuts down a port. The color of the port  
changes to red in the device view.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Editing objects 133  
Status bar  
The status bar displays error and informational messages from the software  
application. These messages are not related to the device being managed.  
Using the buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes  
Table 26 "Device Manager buttons" (page 133) describes buttons in Device  
Manager dialog boxes.  
Table 26  
Device Manager buttons  
Button  
Name  
Description  
Insert  
Opens a dialog box to create a new entry for a table;  
then from the dialog box, inserts the new entry in  
the table.  
Copy  
Paste  
Copies selected cells from a table.  
Pastes copied values to a currently selected table  
cell.  
Reset  
Changes  
Causes changed (but not applied) fields to revert  
to their previous values.  
Print Table or Prints the table or graph that is displayed.  
Print Graph  
Stop/Refresh  
Export Data  
Stops the current action (compiling, saving, and so  
forth). If you are updating or compiling a large data  
table, the Refresh button changes to a Stop button  
while this action is taking place. Clicking the Stop  
button interrupts the polling process.  
Exports information to a file you specify. You can  
then import this file into a text editor or spreadsheet  
for further analysis.  
ATTENTION  
Not all buttons appear in all the dialog boxes.  
Editing objects  
You can edit objects and values in the Device Manager device view in the  
following ways:  
Select an object on the toolbar, click the Edit Selected button.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
134 Getting Started with Device Manager  
The Edit dialog box appears for that object.  
From a switch or port shortcut menu, choose Edit. The Edit dialog  
box appears for that object.  
When you change the value in a box, the changed value is displayed in  
bold. However, changes are not applied to the running configuration until  
you click Apply.  
ATTENTION  
Many dialog boxes contain a Refresh button. After you apply changes to fields,  
click Refresh to display the new information in the dialog box.  
Working with statistics and graphs  
Device Manager tracks a wide range of statistics for the switch and each  
port. You can view and graph statistics for a single object or multiple objects.  
For information about the statistics tracked for the switch and ports, see  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Performance Management — System  
Monitoring (NN47215-502).  
This section describes the types of statistics and graphs available, the graph  
dialog boxes, and the procedure for creating a graph.  
Types of statistics  
The data tables in the statistics dialog boxes list the counters, or categories  
of statistics being gathered, for the specified object. For example, the  
categories for ports include Interface, Ethernet Errors, Bridge, and Rmon.  
Each category can be associated with six types of statistics.  
Table 27 "Types of statistics" (page 134) describes the types of statistics  
that are available.  
Table 27  
Types of statistics  
Statistic  
Description  
AbsoluteValue  
The total count since the last time counters were reset. A  
system reboot resets all counters.  
Cumulative  
The total count since the statistics window was first opened.  
The elapsed time for the cumulative counter is displayed at the  
bottom of the graph window.  
Average  
Minimum  
The cumulative count divided by the cumulative elapsed time.  
The minimum average for the counter for a given polling  
interval over the cumulative elapsed time.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Working with statistics and graphs 135  
Statistic  
Description  
Maximum  
The maximum average for the counter for a given polling  
interval over the cumulative elapsed time.  
LastValue  
The average for the counter over the last polling interval.  
Types of graphs  
With Device Manager, you can create line, area, bar, and pie graphs. Figure  
examples of different types of graphs.  
Figure 39  
Line graph  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
136 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Figure 40  
Area graph  
Figure 41  
Bar graph  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Working with statistics and graphs 137  
Figure 42  
Pie graph  
Statistics for single and multiple objects  
Statistics for a selected object or objects are displayed in the statistics  
dialog box.  
The dialog box for a single object shows all six types of statistics for each  
counter.  
Figure 43  
Interface statistics for a single port  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
138 Getting Started with Device Manager  
The statistics dialog box for multiple objects shows a single type of statistics  
for the selected objects. For example, Figure 44 "Interface statistics for  
multiple ports" (page 138) shows LastValue statistics for the selected ports.  
Figure 44  
Interface statistics for multiple ports  
To change the type of statistics displayed, select a different type from the  
show list at the bottom of the dialog box.  
The statistics are updated based on the poll interval shown at the bottom of  
the dialog box. You can select a different polling interval.  
Buttons for bar, pie, and line graphs are located at the bottom of a statistics  
dialog box.  
See the next section, "Viewing statistics as graphs" (page 138), for  
instructions to use these buttons.  
You can export the statistics to a tab-separated file format and import the  
file into other applications. To export the information, use the Export Data  
button below the table.  
Viewing statistics as graphs  
To create a graph for an object, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the object or objects to be graphed.  
Do one of the following:  
On the toolbar, click Graph Selected.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Working with statistics and graphs 139  
From the shortcut menu for the object, choose Graph.  
From the main menu, choose Graph > Chassis or Graph > Port.  
A statistics dialog box appears with tabs for different categories of  
statistics for the selected object.  
Figure 45  
Statistics dialog box for a port  
3
4
Select a tab for the group of statistics you want to view.  
On the displayed data table, click and drag to select the cells you  
want to graph. (They must be in the same row or column.)  
5
6
Click one of the graph buttons at the bottom of the dialog box  
A graph dialog box appears for the selected graph type.  
To print a copy of the graph, click Print.  
—End—  
Buttons at the top of the graph dialog boxes for line, area, and bar graphs  
allow you to change the orientation of the graph, change the scale, or  
change the graph type.  
The following table describes the buttons in the graph dialog boxes.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
140 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Table 28  
Graph dialog box buttons  
Button Name  
Description  
Stacked  
"Stacks" data quantities instead of displaying them  
side-by-side.  
Horizontal  
Log Scale  
Rotates the graph 90 degrees.  
Changes the scale of the x-axis (of an unrotated graph)  
from numeric to logarithmic.  
Line Chart  
Area Chart  
Bar Chart  
Pie Chart  
Converts an area graph or bar graph to a line graph.  
Converts a line graph or bar graph to an area graph.  
Converts a line graph or area graph to a bar graph.  
Converts a line graph or area graph to a pie chart.  
Telnet session  
From Device Manager, you can initiate a Telnet session to the switch you  
are currently accessing.  
To Telnet to a switch:  
Do one of the following:  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Device> Telnet.  
On the toolbar, click the Telnet button.  
A Telnet window to the switch appears.  
Opening an SSH connection to the device  
From Device Manager, you can initiate a Secure Shell (SSH) connection to  
the the switch you are currently accessing.  
To open an SSH connection to a device, use the following procedure:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Opening the web-based management home page 141  
Do one of the following:  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Device > SSH  
Connection.  
On the toolbar, click the SSH button.  
An SSH window to the device appears.  
ATTENTION  
The SSH connection is established only when the device is SSH capable and  
enabled. For more information on SSH connections, see Nortel Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500 Series Security — Configuration and Management (NN47215-505).  
Opening the web-based management home page  
From the Device Manager, you can access the web-based management  
home page.  
To open the web-based management home page, use the following  
procedure:  
Do one of the following:  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Actions > Open  
Home Page.  
On the toolbar, click the Open Home Page button.  
The web-based management home page appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
142 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Figure 46  
Web-based management home page  
Trap log  
You can configure an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to send SNMP  
generic traps. When the Device Manager is running, any traps received are  
recorded in the trap log. You set the maximum number of entries in the trap  
log using the Properties dialog box ("DCAM-6270493" (page 120)). The  
default number of trap log entries is 500.  
To view the trap log, use the following procedure:  
Do one of the following:  
On the toolbar, click the Trap Log button.  
From the Device Manager Main Menu, choose Device > Trap Log.  
ATTENTION  
When you operate Device Manager from a UNIX platform, you must be logged in  
as root in order to receive traps.  
Device Manager receives traps on port 162. If this port is being used by  
another application, you cannot view the trap log until the other application  
is disabled and Device Manager is restarted.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Online Help 143  
By default, traps are sent in SNMP V2c format. However, if you are using an  
older network management system (NMS), one that supports only SNMP  
V1 traps, you can specify the traps to be sent in V1 format.  
For more information about traps and trap receivers, see Nortel Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series Security — Configuration and Management  
(NN47215-505).  
Online Help  
Online Help in Device Manager is context-sensitive. You use a Web browser  
to display online Help. The Web browser should launch automatically  
when you click the Help button. If the Help topic you are accessing is not  
displayed in your browser, exit the existing browser session and click the  
Help button again.  
If the Web browser does not launch, the default locations of the Help files  
are the directories listed as follows:  
Table 29 "Help file locations" (page 143) describes the Help file locations.  
Table 29  
Help file locations  
Platform  
Default path  
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows  
NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP,  
Windows Vista, UNIX  
<JDM Installation directory>/help/plat  
ypus/v410.zip.  
After you unzip the file, <JDM  
Installation directory>/help/  
platypus/v410/help.html, the help.html  
is the home page for the online help.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
144 Getting Started with Device Manager  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
Using the Web-based management  
interface  
This chapter describes the requirements for using the Web-based  
management interface and how to use it as a tool to configure your Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
Requirements  
To use the web-based management interface, you need the following items:  
A computer connected to a network port that is a member of the  
management VLAN  
One of the following Web browsers installed on the computer:  
— Microsoft* Internet Explorer, version 4.1 or later on Windows 95,  
Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT*, Windows XP*, or  
Windows Vista  
— Netscape Navigator*, version 4.51 or later on Windows 95, Windows  
98, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and  
UNIX*  
IP address of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
ATTENTION  
The Web pages of the web-based management interface may load at different  
speeds depending on the Web browser you use.  
In order to use the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series web-based management  
functionality, such as downloading software, you must connect your TFTP server  
to an Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
For instructions to set the IP address of the switch, see "ip address  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
146 Using the Web-based management interface  
Access to the Web management interface for the switch is enabled by  
default. You can configure access to the interface using the CLI. For  
information about enabling Web access, see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500 Series Security — Configuration and Management (NN47215-505).  
Logging in to the web-based management interface  
Before you log in to the web-based management interface, use the CLI to  
verify the VLAN port assignments and to ensure that your switch CPU and  
computer are assigned to the same VLAN. If the devices are not connected  
to the same VLAN, the IP address cannot display the home page.  
To log in to the web-based management interface, use the following  
procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Start your Web browser.  
In the address bar, type the IP address for your host switch, for  
example, http://192.168.151.175, and press Enter.  
The home page appears.  
Web-based management interface home page  
—End—  
Network security does not exist the first time you access the embedded  
Web server. The system administrator must create access parameters and  
passwords to protect the integrity of your network configuration(s). For more  
information, see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security —  
Configuration and Management (NN47215-505).  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Logging in to the web-based management interface 147  
Menu  
The menu is the same for all pages. It contains a list of seven main headings.  
Figure 47  
Menu  
To navigate the web-based management interface menu, click a menu  
title and then click one of its options. When you click an option, the  
corresponding page appears.  
The first six headings provide options for viewing and configuring switch  
parameters. The Support heading provides options to open the online Help  
file and the Nortel Web site.  
the Web-based management interface and their associated options.  
Table 30  
Main headings and options  
Main menu titles  
Option  
Summary  
Stack Information  
Switch Information  
Identify Unit Numbers  
Stack Numbering  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
148 Using the Web-based management interface  
Main menu titles  
Option  
Configuration  
IP  
System  
Remote Access  
SNMPv1  
SNMPv3  
SNMP Trap  
MAC Address  
Find MAC Address  
Port Management  
High Speed Flow Control  
Software Download  
License Download  
ASCII Config Download  
Configuration File  
Console/Comm Port  
Fault  
RMON Threshold  
RMON Event Log  
System Log  
Statistics  
Port  
Port Error Summary  
Interface  
Ethernet Errors  
Transparent Bridging  
RMON Ethernet  
RMON History  
Applications  
Port Mirroring  
Rate Limiting  
EAPOL Security  
MAC Address Security  
IGMP  
VLAN  
Spanning Tree  
Multilink Trunk  
Link Aggregation  
QoS  
ADAC  
Administration  
System Information  
Quick Start  
Security  
Logout  
Reset  
Reset to Default  
Support  
Help  
Release Notes  
Manuals  
Upgrade  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Logging in to the web-based management interface 149  
Tools are provided in the menu to assist you in navigating the web-based  
management interface.  
CAUTION  
Web browser capabilities such as page bookmarking, refresh,  
and page forward and page back, function as they would in any  
other Web site. However, these capabilities do not enhance the  
functionality of the web-based management interface. Nortel  
recommends that you use only the navigation tools provided in the  
management interface.  
Table 31 "Menu icons" (page 149) describes the icons that appear on the  
menu.  
Table 31  
Menu icons  
Button or icon  
Description  
This icon identifies a menu title. Click on this icon to  
display its options.  
This icon identifies a menu title option. Click on this icon  
to display the corresponding page.  
This icon identifies a menu title option with a hyperlink  
to related pages.  
This icon is linked to an action, for example, logout,  
reset, or reset to system defaults.  
Clicking on the Nortel logo opens the corporate home  
page in a new Web browser.  
Management page  
When you click a menu option, the corresponding management page  
appears. Figure 48 "Console page" (page 150) shows the page displayed  
for the Administration > Security > Console option.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
150 Using the Web-based management interface  
Figure 48  
Console page  
ATTENTION  
The Console Stack Password Setting section is active only when the switch is  
in the stack mode.  
A page is composed of one or more of the following elements:  
Tables and input forms  
The gray cells in a page are display only, and white cells are input fields.  
Check boxes  
You enable or disable a selection by clicking a check box. When a check  
mark is displayed in the box, that selection is enabled. You disable a  
selection by clicking the checked box.  
Icons and buttons  
Icons and buttons perform an action concerning the displayed page or  
the switch. Some pages include a button that opens another page or  
updates the values shown on the current page. Some pages include  
icons that initiate an action, such as reformatting the current displayed  
data as a bar or pie chart.  
Table 32 "Page icons" (page 151) describes the icons that you use to modify  
information in a statistical table.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Viewing stack information 151  
Table 32  
Page icons  
Icon  
Name  
Description  
Modify  
Accesses a modification page for the selected  
row.  
View  
Accesses a view only statistics page for the  
selected row.  
Delete  
Help  
Deletes a row.  
Accesses the Help menu in a new Web browser.  
ATTENTION  
Text within a table that is underlined and  
highlighted in blue and is a hyperlink to a  
related management page.  
Viewing stack information  
ATTENTION  
The Embedded Web Server automatically detects the operational mode of your  
system. If the system is in stand-alone mode, the Stack Information page option  
is not listed in the menu.  
To view stack information:  
Step Action  
1
Open the Stack Information screen by selecting Summary > Stack  
Information from the menu. This screen is illustrated in Figure 49  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
152 Using the Web-based management interface  
Figure 49  
Stack Information page  
"Stack Information screen fields" (page 152) describes the fields on the  
Stack Information and Stack Inventory sections of the Stack Information  
screen.  
Stack Information screen fields  
Section  
Fields  
Description  
Stack Inform System Description  
ation  
The name created in the configuration process to identify  
the stack.  
Software Version  
MAC Address  
IP Address  
The version of the running software.  
The MAC address of the stack.  
The IP address of the stack.  
Manufacturing Date  
Code  
The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format:  
YYYYMMDD.  
Serial Number  
The serial number of the base unit.  
Operational State  
The current operational state of the device. The operational  
states are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled,  
Normal, Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal  
Errors, Fatal Error, and Not Configured.  
Stack Invent Unit  
ory  
The unit number assigned to the device by the network  
manager. For more information about stack numbering,  
Description  
The description of the device or its subcomponent.  
The SFP GBICs connected to the switch.  
Pluggable port  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Viewing summary information 153  
Section  
Fields  
Description  
Software Version  
Operational State  
The current running software version.  
The current operational state of the stack. The operational  
states are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled,  
Normal, Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal  
Errors, Fatal Error, and Not Configured.  
Viewing summary information  
You can view summary information about the switch. For example, the unit  
number and its corresponding physical description and serial number.  
To view summary switch information, use the following procedure:  
From the main menu, choose Summary > Switch Information.  
The Switch Information page appears.  
Figure 50  
Switch Information page  
the Switch Information page.  
Table 33  
Switch Information page fields  
Item  
Description  
Module Description  
The factory set description of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
Series.  
Pluggable Port 25/49  
Pluggable Port 26/50  
Firmware Version  
The factory set description of the sub-component/GBIC.  
The factory set description of the sub-component/GBIC.  
The firmware version of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
The version of the running software.  
Software Version  
Manufacturing Data Code  
The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
154 Using the Web-based management interface  
Item  
Description  
Hardware Version  
Serial #  
The hardware version of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
The serial number of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
Operational State  
The current operational state of the device. The operational states  
are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal, Reset in  
Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal Errors, Fatal Error, and Not  
Configured.  
Mac Address  
IP Address  
Fans Status  
The mac address of the switch.  
The IP address of the switch.  
The fan status of the switch.  
Changing stack numbering  
If the system is in a stack, existing stack numbering information can be  
viewed and renumbered.  
ATTENTION  
The unit number does not affect the base unit designation.  
To view or renumber devices within the stack framework:  
Step Action  
1
Open the Stack Numbering screen by selecting Summary > Stack  
Numbering from the menu. This screen is illustrated in Stack  
Numbering page.  
Figure 51  
Stack Numbering page  
on the Stack Numbering screen.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Identifying unit numbers 155  
Stack Numbering screen fields  
Field Item  
Range  
Description  
1..8  
Stack Numb Current Unit  
ering Setting Number  
Unit number previously assigned to the  
policy switch. The entries in this column are  
displayed in order of their current physical  
cabling with respect to the base unit, and  
can show non-consecutive unit numbering  
if one or more units were previously moved  
or modified. The entries also can include  
unit numbers of units that are no longer  
participating in the stack (not currently  
active).  
MAC Address  
XX.XX.XX.XX.XX.X MAC address of the corresponding unit  
X
listed in the Current Unit Number field.  
New Unit  
Number  
1..8, None  
Choose a new number to assign to your  
selected policy switch.  
ATTENTION  
If you leave the field blank, the system  
automatically selects the next available  
number.  
2
3
4
Choose the new number to assign to the switch.  
Click Submit.  
A message prompts for confirmation of the request. Click Yes.  
—End—  
Identifying unit numbers  
Identify the unit numbers of the switches participating in a stack configuration  
by viewing the LEDs on the front panel of each switch.  
To identify unit numbers in your configuration:  
Step Action  
1
Open the Identify Unit Numbers screen by selecting Summary >  
Identify Unit Numbers from the menu. This screen is illustrated in  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
156 Using the Web-based management interface  
Figure 52  
Identifying Unit Numbers page  
2
To continue viewing summary information or to start the configuration  
process, choose another option from the main menu.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
157  
Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and  
2550T-PWR  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T-PWR and 2526T-PWR provide IEEE  
802.3af-compliant power over half of the front-panel RJ-45 ports, located on  
the left-hand side of the front panel. The switch provides power discovery,  
power management, and statistics on power use on each port and each  
switch basis. You can use the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to  
provide power to network appliances, such as IP telephones, wireless  
access points, and video devices.  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR provide Power  
over Ethernet for 12 and 24 ports with respectively. The switches only  
support PoE on the lower-numbered ports (identified by a red border). The  
switches provide a maximum of 168 Watts of power to PoE ports. Adequate  
power is available to supply, on average, 7 Watts for each port on the  
2550T-PWR, and 14 Watts for each port on the 2526T-PWR. A maximum of  
15.4 Watts is available on any port for any given device.  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2550T-PWR and 2526T-PWR supply data  
terminal equipment (DTE) power only on signal pins.  
By default, power is allocated based on real time measurements. If the total  
Ethernet power budget for the switch is exceeded, the switch sheds load  
by shutting down power to ports.  
You configure the Power over Ethernet (PoE) parameters on the PoE ports  
using the Command Line Interface (CLI), the web-based management  
system, or Device Manager (JDM).  
This chapter contains the following topics:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
158 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
Diagnosing and correcting PoE problems  
This section discusses some common problems in using the PoE features  
of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500-PWR. This section discusses the  
following topics:  
Status codes on PoE ports  
You may see an error displayed for a port running PoE. If these errors  
appear, they are in the port status section of the PoE displays in the CLI  
and the web-based management system. The following are the messages  
that display and their explanations:  
Detecting—port detecting IP device requesting power  
Delivering power—port delivering requested power to device  
Disabled—port power state disabled  
Invalid PD—port detecting device that is not valid to request power  
Deny low priority—power disabled from port because of port setting and  
demands on power budget  
Overload—power disabled from port because port is overloaded  
Test—port in testing mode, which is set using SNMP  
Error—an unspecified error condition  
Configuring PoE switch parameters using the CLI  
You configure power parameters for each Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500-PWR using the CLI. You can configure the DC power source, the  
power pairs, and the power usage with this management system. This  
section contains information about the following topics:  
poe poe-pd-detect-type command  
The poe poe-pd-detect-type command sets the method the Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500-PWR uses to detect the power devices connected to  
the front ports. The syntax for the poe poe-pd-detect-type command  
is:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring PoE switch parameters using the CLI 159  
poe poe-pd-detect-type  
{802dot3af | 802dot3af_and_legacy | Unit}  
The poe poe-pd-detect-type command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
ATTENTION  
You must ensure that this setting is the correct one for the IP appliance you  
use with the switch. Please note this setting applies to the entire switch, not  
port-by-port. So, you must ensure that this setting is configured correctly for all  
the IP appliances on a specified switch.  
describes the parameters and variables for the poe poe-pd-detect-type  
command.  
Table 34  
poe poe-pd-detect-type command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
802dot3af |  
802dot3af_and  
_legacy  
Sets the detection method the switch use to detect power needs of devices  
connected to front ports:  
• 802dot3af  
• 802dot3af_and_legacy  
ATTENTION  
The default setting is 802dot3af. Ensure that the power detection method  
you choose for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500-PWR matches that used  
by the IP devices you are powering.  
Unit  
Set the unit in stack to apply the detection method.  
poe poe-power-usage-threshold command  
The poe poe-power-usage-threshold command lets you set a  
percentage usage threshold above which the system sends a trap  
for each Ethernet Routing Switch 2500-PWR. The syntax for the poe  
poe-power-usage-threshold command is:  
poe poe-power-usage-threshold {<1-99> | Unit}  
The poe poe-power-usage-threshold command is executed in the  
Global Configuration command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
160 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
variables" (page 160) describes the parameters and variables for the poe  
poe-power-usage-threshold command.  
Table 35  
poe poe-power-usage-threshold command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
<1-99>  
Enter the percentage of total available power you  
want the switch to use prior to sending a trap.  
ATTENTION  
The default setting is 80%.  
Unit  
Set a percentage usage threshold above which the  
system sends a trap for each unit.  
poe poe-trap command  
The poe poe-trap command enables the traps for the PoE functions on  
the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500-PWR. The syntax for the poe poe-trap  
command is:  
poe poe-trap {Unit}  
The poe poe-trap command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
no poe-trap command  
The no poe-trap command disables the traps for the PoE functions on  
the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500-PWR. The syntax for the no poe-trap  
command is:  
no poe-trap {Unit}  
The no poe-trap command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
Configuring PoE port parameters using the CLI  
You can configure power parameters for each port on the Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500 PWR Series using the CLI. You enable the power and set  
the power limit and power priority on each port. This section covers the  
following topics:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring PoE port parameters using the CLI 161  
no poe-shutdown command  
The no poe-shutdown command enables power to the port. The syntax  
for the no poe-shutdown command is:  
no poe-shutdown [port <portlist>]  
The no poe-shutdown command is executed in the Interface  
Configuration command mode.  
161) describes the parameters and variables for the no poe-shutdown  
command.  
Table 36  
no poe-shutdown command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Enter the port numbers on which you want to enable  
power.  
The default value is enabled.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the  
port entered with the interface FastEthernet  
command.  
poe poe-shutdown command  
The poe poe-shutdown command disables power to the port. The syntax  
for the poe poe-shutdown command is:  
poe poe-shutdown [port <portlist>]  
The poe poe-shutdown command is executed in the Interface  
Configuration command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
162 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
162) describes the parameters and variables for the poe poe-shutdown  
command.  
Table 37  
poe poe-shutdown command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Enter the port numbers on which you want to disable  
power.  
The default value is enabled.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the  
port entered with the interface FastEthernet  
command.  
poe poe-priority command  
The poe poe-priority command lets you set the power priority for each  
port to low, high, or critical. The system uses the port power priority settings  
to distribute power to the ports depending on the available power budget.  
The syntax for the poe poe-priority command is:  
poe poe-priority [port <portlist>] {low | high | critical}  
The poe poe-priority command is executed in the Interface  
Configuration command mode.  
162) describes the parameters and variables for the poe poe-priority  
command.  
Table 38  
poe poe-priority command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Enter the port numbers on which you want to disable  
power.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring PoE port parameters using the CLI 163  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the  
port entered with the interface FastEthernet  
command.  
low | high |  
critical  
Sets the port priority as:  
low  
high  
critical  
ATTENTION  
The default setting is low. When two ports have the  
same priority and one must be shut down, the port  
with the higher port number is shut down first.  
poe poe-limit command  
The poe poe-limit command sets the maximum power allowed to a  
port. The syntax for the poe poe-limit command is:  
poe poe-limit [port <portlist>] <3-16>  
The poe poe-limit command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
164) describes the parameters and variables for the poe poe-limit command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
164 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
Table 39  
poe poe-limit command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
<3-16>  
ports  
Enter the maximum number of watts you want for the  
specified port.  
The range is 3W to 16W; the default value is 16W.  
Enter the port number you want to disable power on.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the  
port entered with the interface FastEthernet  
command.  
Displaying PoE configuration using the CLI  
You display the status for the PoE configuration on the Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500-PWR using the following CLI commands:  
show poe-main-status command  
The show poe-main-status command displays the current PoE  
configuration of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500-PWR, and each port PoE  
settings. The syntax for the show poe-main-status command is:  
show poe-main-status {Unit}  
The show poe-main-status command is executed in the User Exec  
command mode.  
Figure 53 "show poe-main-status" (page 165) displays sample output from  
the show poe-main-status command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Displaying PoE configuration using the CLI 165  
Figure 53  
show poe-main-status command output  
ATTENTION  
The Power Source Present listing displays the current power source for the  
switch: AC Only.  
show poe-port-status command  
The show poe-port-status command displays the status, power  
status, power limit, and port priority of each port. The syntax for the show  
poe-port-status command is:  
show poe-port-status [port <portlist>]  
The show poe-port-status command is executed in the User Exec  
command mode.  
The DTE Power Status displays error messages if the port is not providing  
power. The following messages can appear:  
Detecting—port detecting IP device requesting power  
Delivering power—port delivering requested power to device  
Invalid PD—port detecting device that is not valid to request power  
Deny low priority—power disabled from port because of port setting and  
demands on power budget  
Overload—power disabled from port because port is overloaded  
Test—port in testing mode  
Error—none of the other conditions apply  
166) describes the parameters and variables for the show poe-port-status  
command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
166 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
Table 40  
show poe-port-status command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Enter the ports for which you want to display the  
status.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system displays all  
ports.  
sample output from the show poe-port-status command.  
Figure 54  
show poe-port-status command output  
show poe-power-measurement command  
The show poe-power-measurement command displays the voltage,  
current and power values for each powered device connected to each port.  
The syntax for the show poe-power-measurement command is:  
show poe-power-measurement [port <portlist>]  
The show poe-power-measurement command is executed in the User  
Exec command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring PoE using web-based management 167  
variables" (page 167) shows the variables and parameters for the show  
poe-power-measurement command.  
Table 41  
show poe-power-measurement command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port  
<portlist>  
Enter the ports for which you want to display the  
power measurements.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system displays all  
ports.  
167) displays sample output from the show poe-power-measurement  
command.  
Figure 55  
show poe-power-measurement command output  
Configuring PoE using web-based management  
You can display and configure Power over Ethernet (PoE) parameters using  
the web-based management system.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
168 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
Displaying and configuring power management for the switch  
To display and configure power settings for the entire switch, use the  
following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > PoE Management  
> Global Power Mgmt.  
The Global Power Management page appears ("Global Power  
Global Power Management page  
The following table describes the items on the Global Power  
Management page.  
Table 42  
Global Power Management page items  
Item  
Description  
Available DTE  
Power  
Displays the amount of power available to powered devices from the switch.  
DTE Power Status Displays the status of the PoE feature. It displays:  
Normal--all power functioning correctly  
Error--PoE failed  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring PoE using web-based management 169  
Item  
Description  
DTE Power  
Displays total power use on all devices currently drawing power.  
Consumption  
DTE Power  
Enter the percentage of total power consumption on the switch necessary to  
Usage Threshold trigger a trap.  
The default value is 80%.  
Power Pair  
Displays the power pair of the RJ-45 pin connectors that supplies the power.  
The only available option for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Seris is Signal.  
ATTENTION  
Ensure that the power pair used by the IP devices you are powering  
matches the power pair for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
Traps Control  
Choose to enable or disable trap from agent.  
PD Detect Type  
Choose the type of power detection you want for the switch:  
802.3af  
802.3af and legacy  
The default is 802.3af.  
ATTENTION  
Ensure that the power detection method you choose for the Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series matches that used by the IP devices you are  
powering.  
Power Source  
Present  
This display-only field displays the current power supply for the switch:  
AC Only--using only the internal power source of the switch  
AC Power Status Displays the current status of AC power on the switch.  
DC Power Status Displays the current status of DC power on the switch (Not Present).  
2
3
Type the information, or make a selection from the list.  
Click Submit.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
170 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
Displaying and configuring power management for the ports  
To configure power management settings for each port, use the following  
procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > PoE Management >  
Port Property.  
The Port Property page appears ("Port Property page" (page 170)).  
Port Property page  
The following table describes the items on the Port Property page.  
Table 43  
Port Property page items  
Item  
Description  
Admin Status  
Choose to enable or disable power on the selected port.  
The default value is Enabled.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring PoE using web-based management 171  
Item  
Description  
Displays the status of the PoE feature. It displays:  
Current Status  
Disabled—detecting function is disabled  
Searching—detecting function is enabled and the system is searching for  
a valid powered device on this port  
Delivering power— detection found a valid powered device and the port  
is delivering power  
Fault—power-specific fault detected on the port  
Test—detecting function is in test mode, which is set using SNMP  
Other fault—detecting function is idle due to fault  
ATTENTION  
Nortel recommends against using the test operational status.  
Classifica-  
tion  
Classification is a way to tag different terminals on the power over LAN network  
according to their power consumption. Devices such as IP telephones, WLAN  
access points, and others are classified according to their power requirements.  
The meaning of the classification labels is defined in the IEEE 802.3af  
specification.  
This parameter is valid only while a device is being powered.  
Limit (Watt)  
Priority  
Sets the maximum amount of power supplied to that port.  
The range for Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is 3W to 16W. The default  
value is 16W.  
Priority is used to determine which port(s) are shut down when the total power  
of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series exceeds the power budget for  
that switch (or available DTE power). The lower priority ports are shut down  
in favor of higher priority ports.  
The range is low, high, and critical. The default value is low.  
ATTENTION  
When two ports have the same priority and one must be shut down, the port  
with the higher port number is shut down first.  
Volt (V)  
Displays the measured voltage supplied by the port.  
Displays the measured current supplied by the port.  
Displays the measured power supplied by the port.  
Current (mA)  
Power (Watt)  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
2
3
Type the information, or make a selection from the list.  
Click Submit.  
—End—  
Editing and viewing switch PoE configurations using Device  
Manager  
You can use Device Manager to view and edit the Power over Ethernet  
(PoE) parameters that apply to the whole switch. You can also use Device  
Manager to set PoE parameters on individual ports.  
One PoE-related tab that is not described in this section is the Power Supply  
tab. This tab is accessible through the Chassis dialog box, and it displays  
the status of the internal power supply (see Power Supply tab ).  
The following sections provide a description of the PoE tabs, and details  
about each item on the tab:  
PoE tab for a single unit  
To open the PoE tab for a single unit, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select a single unit.  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Unit.  
The Unit dialog box appears with the Unit tab displayed .  
3
Click the PoE tab.  
The PoE tab appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing and viewing switch PoE configurations using Device Manager 173  
Edit Unit dialog box—PoE tab for a single unit  
—End—  
tab items for a single unit.  
Table 44  
PoE tab items for a single unit  
Item  
Description  
Power  
Displays the total power available to the switch.  
Displays the power state of the switch:  
OperStatus  
on  
off  
faulty  
Consumption  
Power  
Displays the power being used by the switch.  
UsageThreshold  
Lets you set a percentage of the total power usage of the  
switch above which the system sends a trap.  
ATTENTION  
You must enable the traps (NotificationControlEnable)  
to receive a power usage trap.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
174 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
Item  
Description  
Notification  
ControlEnable  
Lets you enable or disable sending traps if the switch power  
usage exceeds the percentage set in the UsageThreshold  
field.  
PowerDevice  
DetectType  
Lets you set the power detection type that the switch uses  
to detect a request for power from a device connected to  
all ports on the switch:  
• 802.3af  
• 802.3af and legacy  
ATTENTION  
The default setting is 802.3af. Ensure that this setting  
matches the setting for the detection type used by the  
powered devices on this switch.  
Device Manager display for PoE ports  
The Device Manager displays PoE ports differently than non-PoE port.  
ERS 2550T-PWR with PoE ports  
The port coloring scheme for the data aspect is the same for PoE ports  
as for all other ports. The difference for the PoE ports is the addition of  
the power aspect (colored p).  
Table 45 "Port power color codes" (page 174) shows the status assigned to  
each color.  
Table 45  
Port power color codes  
Description  
Color  
Green P  
Specifies that the port is currently delivering power.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Editing and viewing switch PoE configurations using Device Manager 175  
Description  
Color  
Red P  
Specifies that the power and detection mechanism for the  
port is disabled.  
Orange P  
Specifies that the power and detection mechanism for the port  
is enabled. However the port is not currently delivering power.  
White/Gray P  
Specifies that the power and detection mechanism for the  
port is unknown.  
ATTENTION  
The coloring scheme for data aspect and the power aspect are independent of  
each other. With this GUI enhancement, you can view the initial status for both  
data and power aspect for the port.  
PoE tab for ports  
The PoE tab lets you configure PoE power settings for ports.  
To view the PoE tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the port you want to edit.  
Do one of the following:  
Double-click the selected port.  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.  
On the toolbar, click Edit.  
The Port dialog box appears with the Interface tab displayed.  
3
Click the PoE tab.  
The PoE tab appears.  
Edit Port dialog box— PoE tab  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
176 Power over Ethernet for the Ethernet Routing Switch 2526T-PWR and 2550T-PWR  
—End—  
PoE tab items  
Table 46 "PoE tab items" (page 176) describes the PoE tab items.  
Table 46  
PoE tab items  
Item  
Description  
AdminEnable  
Lets you enable or disable PoE on this port.  
By default, PoE is enabled.  
Detection Status  
Displays the operational status of the power-device  
detecting mode on the specified port:  
• disabled—detecting function disabled  
• searching—detecting function is enabled and the  
system is searching for a valid powered device on  
this port  
• deliveringPower—detection found a valid powered  
device and the port is delivering power  
• fault—power-specific fault detected on port  
• test—detecting device in test mode  
• otherFault  
ATTENTION  
Nortel recommends against using the test  
operational status.  
PowerClassifications  
PowerPriority  
Classification is a way to tag different terminals on  
the Power over LAN network according to their power  
consumption. Devices such as IP telephones, WLAN  
access points, and others can be classified according to  
their power requirements.  
Lets you set the power priority for the specified port to:  
critical  
high  
low  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
177  
System configuration using the CLI  
In the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series, the Command Line Interface  
(CLI) commands lets you display and modify the switch configuration while  
the switch is operating.  
This chapter includes information about general switch maintenance, such  
as setting up access parameters, upgrading the software, and setting the  
speed. This chapter contains information about the following topics:  
Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and default gateway  
IP notation  
To enter IP addresses and subnet masks in the CLI, enter both  
the IP address and the subnet mask in dotted decimal notation  
(XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX).  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
178 System configuration using the CLI  
Assigning and clearing IP addresses  
Using the CLI, you can assign IP addresses and Gateway addresses, clear  
these addresses, and view configured IP addresses. This section contains  
information about the following topics:  
ip address command  
The ip address command sets the IP address and subnet mask for the  
switch. The syntax for the ip address command is:  
ip address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [netmask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]  
The ip address command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
178) describes the parameters and variables for the ip address command.  
Table 47  
ip address command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
Enter IP address in dotted decimal notation; netmask is  
optional.  
netmask  
Set the IP subnet mask for the switch.  
ATTENTION  
When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection  
to Telnet and the Web.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and default gateway 179  
default ip address command  
The default ip address command sets the IP address for the  
specified unit to the default value as 192.168.1.1 for Standalone Mode and  
192.168.1.2 for Stacking Mode. The syntax for the default ip address  
command is:  
default ip address  
The default ip address command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
no ip address command  
The no ip address command clears the IP address and subnet mask.  
This command sets the IP address and subnet mask for a switch to all zeros  
(0). The syntax for the no ip address command is:  
no ip address  
The no ip address command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
The no ip address command has no parameters or variables.  
ATTENTION  
When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection to  
Telnet and the Web. You also disable any new Telnet connection, and you must  
connect to the serial Console port to configure a new IP address.  
default ip netmask command  
The default ip netmask command sets the subnet mask to the  
default value (255.255.255.0). The syntax for the default ip netmask  
command is:  
default ip netmask  
The default ip netmask command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The default ip netmask command has no parameters or variables .  
no ip netmask command  
The no ip netmask command sets the subnet mask for a switch to all  
zeros (000.000.000.000). The syntax for the no ip netmask command  
is:  
no ip netmask  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
180 System configuration using the CLI  
The no ip netmask command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
The no ip netmask command has no parameters or variables .  
ip default-gateway command  
The ip default-gateway command sets the IP default gateway address  
for a switch. The syntax for the ip default-gateway command is:  
ip default-gateway <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>  
The ip default-gateway command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
180) describes the parameters and variables for the ip default-gateway  
command.  
Table 48  
ip default-gateway command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
Enter the dotted-decimal IP address of the default IP  
gateway.  
ATTENTION  
When you change the IP gateway, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.  
no ip default-gateway command  
The no ip default-gateway command sets the IP default gateway  
address to zeros (0). The syntax for the no ip default-gateway  
command is:  
no ip default-gateway  
The no ip default-gateway command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The no ip default-gateway command has no parameters or variables.  
ATTENTION  
When you change the IP gateway address, you may lose connection to Telnet and  
the Web. You also may disable any new Telnet connection required to connect to  
the serial Console port to configure a new IP Gateway address.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and default gateway 181  
default ip default-gateway command  
The default ip default-gateway command sets the IP default  
gateway address to all zeros (000.000.000.000). The syntax for the  
default ip default-gateway command is:  
default ip default-gateway  
The default ip default-gateway command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The default ip default-gateway command has no parameters or  
variables.  
show ip command  
The show ip command displays the IP configurations, specifically BootP  
mode, switch address, subnet mask, and gateway address. This command  
displays the these parameters for what is configured, what is in use, and the  
last BootP. The syntax for the show ip command is:  
show ip [bootp] [default-gateway] [address [switch]] [dns]  
The show ip command is executed in the User Exec command mode.  
If you do not enter any parameters, this command displays all the IP-related  
configuration information.  
the parameters and variables for the show ip command.  
Table 49  
show ip command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
bootp mode  
default-gateway  
address  
Displays BootP-related IP information.  
Displays the IP address of the default gateway.  
Displays the current IP address.  
switch  
Specifies current IP address of the switch.  
Displays DNS configuration.  
dns  
of the show ip command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
182 System configuration using the CLI  
Figure 56  
show ip command output  
show ip address command  
The show ip address command displays the IP configurations, switch  
address, subnet mask, and gateway address. The syntax for the show  
ip address command is:  
show ip address  
The show ip address command is executed in the User Exec command  
mode.  
182) describes the parameters and variables for the show ip address  
command.  
Table 50  
show ip address command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
address  
Displays the current IP address.  
output of the show ip address command.  
Figure 57  
show ip address command output  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the switch IP address, subnet mask and default gateway 183  
Pinging  
To ensure that the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series has connectivity to  
the network, ping a device you know is connected to this network.  
ping command  
The ping command tests the network connection to another network  
device. The command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)  
packet from the switch to the target device. The local IP address must be  
set before issuing the ping command. See "Assigning and clearing IP  
addresses" (page 178) for information on setting IP addresses.  
The syntax for the ping command is:  
ping <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [datasize <64-4096>]  
[{count <1-9999>} | continuous] [{timeout | -t} <1-120>]  
[interval <1-60>] [debug]  
The ping command is executed in the User Exec command mode.  
the parameters and variables for the ping command.  
Table 51  
ping command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
Specify the IP address of the target device in  
dotted-decimal notation.  
datasize  
<64-4096>  
Specifies the size of the ICMP packet to be sent. The  
data size range is from 64 to 4096 bytes.  
{count <1-9999> }  
| continuous  
Sets the number of ICMP packets to be sent. The  
continuous mode sets the ping running until the user  
interrupts it by entering Ctrl-C.  
Set the timeout using either the timeout or -t  
parameter followed by the number of seconds the switch  
must wait before timing out.  
{timeout | -t}  
<1-120>  
interval <1-60>  
debug  
Specifies the number of seconds between transmitted  
packets.  
Provides additional output information such as ICMP  
sequence number and trip time.  
If the device receives the packet, it sends a ping reply. When the switch  
receives the reply, it displays a message indicating that the specified IP  
address is being used. If no reply is received, a message indicates that the  
address is not responding.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
184 System configuration using the CLI  
responses.  
Figure 58  
ping command responses  
Resetting the switch to default configuration  
The restore factory-default command resets the switch to its  
default configuration.  
The syntax for the restore factory-default command is:  
restore factory-default [ -y | force]  
where the -y or force parameter instructs the switch not to prompt for  
confirmation. If the -y or force parameter is not included in the command,  
the following message appears:  
Warning the switch will be reset to factory default  
configuration  
Do you wish to continue (y/n) ?  
Enter y to restore the switch to default.  
The restore factory-default command is executed in the Privileged  
EXEC command mode.  
Using DNS to ping and telnet  
Using the Domain Name Server (DNS) client, you can ping or telnet to a  
host server or to a host by name. To use this feature, you must configure  
at least one DNS; you may also configure a default domain name. If you  
configure a default domain name, that name is appended to hostnames that  
do not contain a dot. The default domain name and addresses are saved  
in NVRAM.  
The hostnames for ping and telnet cannot be longer than 63 alphanumeric  
characters, and the default DNS domain name cannot be longer than 255  
characters. This section covers these commands:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using DNS to ping and telnet 185  
show ip dns command  
The show ip dns command displays the DNS domain name, as well as  
any configured DNS servers. The syntax for the show ip dns command is:  
show ip dns  
The show ip dns command is executed in the User Exec command mode.  
The show ip dns command has no parameters or variables.  
output from the show ip dns command.  
Figure 59  
show ip dns command output  
ping command  
The ping command tests the network connection to another network  
device. The command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)  
packet from the switch to the target device. The local IP address must be  
set before issuing the ping command.  
You can ping a host using either its IP address or hostname.  
The syntax for the ping command is:  
ping <A.B.C.D or Hostname>  
The ping command is executed in the User Exec command mode.  
the parameters and variables for the ping command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
186 System configuration using the CLI  
Table 52  
ping command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
<A.B.C.D or  
Hostname>  
Specify:  
the IP address of the target device in dotted-decimal  
notation  
the hostname of the device to ping (The hostname  
can be a simple name, such as fred; in this case  
the DNS domain name, if set, is appended. Or  
the hostname can be a full hostname, such as  
fred.ca.nortel.com.)  
If the device receives the packet, it sends a ping reply. When the switch  
receives the reply, it displays a message indicating that the specified IP  
address is being used. If no reply is received, a message indicates that the  
address is not responding.  
responses.  
Figure 60  
ping command responses  
There is no default value for this command.  
ip name-server command  
The ip name-server command adds one or more DNS servers’ IP  
addresses. The syntax for the ip name-server command is:  
ip name-server <A.B.C.D>  
The ip name-server command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
ATTENTION  
You can add up to three servers; adding one at a time.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using DNS to ping and telnet 187  
187) describes the parameters and variables for the ip name-server  
command.  
Table 53  
ip name-server command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
<A.B.C.D>  
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.  
The default value is 0.0.0.0.  
no ip name-server command  
The no ip name-server command removes one or more DNS servers’  
IP addresses. The syntax for the no ip name-server command is:  
no ip name-server <A.B.C.D>  
The no ip name-server command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
187) describes the parameters and variables for the no ip name-server  
command.  
Table 54  
no ip name-server command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
<A.B.C.D>  
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.  
The default value is 0.0.0.0.  
ip domain-name command  
The ip domain-name command sets the system’s DNS domain name.  
The syntax for the ip domain-name command is:  
ip domain-name [<LINE>]  
The ip domain-name command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
188) describes the parameters and variables for the ip domain-name  
command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
188 System configuration using the CLI  
Table 55  
ip domain-name command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
<LINE>  
Enter a DNS domain name.  
The default value for this command is an empty string.  
no ip domain-name command  
The no ip domain-name command clears the system’s DNS domain  
name (sets it to an empty string). The syntax for the no ip domain-name  
command is:  
no ip domain-name  
The no ip domain-name command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The no ip domain-name command has no parameters or variables.  
default ip domain-name command  
The default ip domain-name command clears the system’s DNS  
domain name (set it to an empty string). The syntax for the default ip  
domain-name command is:  
default ip domain-name  
The default ip domain-name command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The default ip domain-name command has no parameters or  
variables.  
Configuration Management  
This section covers the following topics:  
Automatically loading Configuration file  
This section discusses how to download a configuration file when the  
system boots. You use standard CLI commands to modify the configuration  
file you want to download. This section contains information about the  
following commands:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuration Management 189  
configure network command  
The configure network command lets you load and execute a script  
immediately and to configure parameters to automatically download  
a configuration file when you reboot the switch. The syntax for the  
configure network command is:  
configure network [load-on-boot  
{disable|use-bootp|use-config}] [filename <WORD>] [address  
<XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]  
The configure network command is executed in the User Exec mode.  
ATTENTION  
When you enter configure network with no parameters, the system prompts  
you for the script file name and TFTP server address and then downloads the  
script.  
189) describes the parameters and variables for the configure network  
command.  
Table 56  
configure network command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
load-on-boot {disable|use-b  
ootp|use-config  
Specifies the settings for automatically loading a configuration file  
when the system boots:  
• disable—disables the automatic loading of config file  
• use-boot—specifies using the BootP file as the automatically  
loaded config file  
• use-config—specifies using the ASCII configuration file as the  
automatically loaded config file  
ATTENTION  
When you enter configure network with no parameters, the  
system prompts you for the script file name and TFTP server  
address and then downloads the script.  
If you omit this parameter, the system immediately downloads  
and runs the ASCII config file.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
190 System configuration using the CLI  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
filename <WORD>  
Specifies the file name.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP, the system  
uses the configured file name.  
address <XXX.XXX.XXX.X  
XX>  
Specifies the TFTP server from which to load the file. Enter the IP  
address in dotted-decimal notation.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP, the system  
uses the configured address.  
ATTENTION  
When you specify the file name or address, these parameters change at the next  
reboot, even if you do not specify load-on-boot.  
show config-network command  
The show config-network command displays information regarding  
the automatic loading of the configuration file, including the current status  
of this feature, the file name, the TFTP server address, and the status of  
the previous automatic configuration command. The syntax for the show  
config-network command is:  
show config-network  
The show config-network command is executed in the Privileged  
EXEC command mode.  
The show config-network command has no parameters or values.  
output for the show config-network command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Management 191  
Figure 61  
show config-network command output  
ASCII Configuration Generator  
The primary goal of the ASCII Configuration Generator (ACG) is to provide  
the users of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series with a tool that lets  
them easily modify configuration of a particular switch or stack.  
ACG generates an ASCII configuration file which reproduces the behavior of  
the current binary configuration file. The user can also rely on this function  
to maintain backup configurations, as well as use it as a reliable method for  
debugging the current configuration of a switch.  
ATTENTION  
When you are connected to a stack form the console port, ensure that the console  
is on the base unit before downloading an ASCII file.  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series can download an editable ASCII  
configuration file from the TFTP server. You can load the ASCII configuration  
file automatically at boot time or on demand using console menus or CLI.  
Once downloaded, the configuration file automatically configures the switch  
according to the Command Line Interface (CLI) commands in the file. The  
maximum size for an ASCII configuration file is 100 KBs; larger configuration  
files must be split into multiple files.  
For more information on loading the ASCII configuration file automatically,  
The commands that are associated with ACG are:  
show running-config command  
This command displays the current configuration of switch as a series of  
CLI commands.  
This command must be executed in the configuration mode and has no  
parameters or variables.  
The syntax of this command is:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
192 System configuration using the CLI  
show running-config  
output of the show running-config command  
Figure 62  
show running-config command output  
copy running-config tftp command  
This command copies contents of the current configuration file to another  
file on the TFTP server. The syntax of the command is  
copy running-config tftp {<address> <filename>}  
This command can be executed in the Global Configuration command mode.  
(page 192) describes the parameters and variables of this command.  
Table 57  
copy running-config tftp command parameters and variables  
Parameter  
address  
Description  
Signifies the IP address of the TFTP server.  
filename  
Denotes the filename to store configuration commands  
on the TFTP server.  
ATTENTION  
Use the copy running-config tftp command only from the base unit in  
a stack.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Customizing your system 193  
Customizing your system  
You can customize your system using the CLI commands described in this  
section. This section covers the following topics:  
Setting the terminal  
You can view the terminal settings, set them to default settings, or customize  
the terminal settings. This sections contains information about the following  
commands:  
show terminal command  
The show terminal command displays the current serial port information,  
which includes connection speed, as well as the terminal width and length  
in number of characters. The syntax for the show terminal command is:  
show terminal  
The show terminal command is executed in the User Exec command  
mode.  
The show terminal command has no parameters or variables.  
from the show terminal command.  
Figure 63  
show terminal command output  
terminal command  
The terminal command configures the settings for the terminal. These  
settings are transmit and receive speeds, terminal length, and terminal  
width. The syntax of the terminal command is:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
194 System configuration using the CLI  
terminal speed {2400|4800|9600|19200|38400}|length  
<1-132>|width <1-132>  
The terminal command is executed in the User Exec mode.  
194) describes the parameters and variables for the terminal command.  
Table 58  
terminal command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
speed  
{2400|4800|9600|192  
00|38400}  
Sets the transmit and receive baud rates for the terminal.  
You can set the speed at one of the five options shown;  
default is 9600.  
length  
Sets the length of the terminal display in characters;  
default is 24.  
width  
Sets the width of the terminal displaying characters;  
default 79.  
show cli command  
The show cli command displays the current CLI settings. The syntax for  
the show cli command is:  
show cli {info | mode | password [type]}  
The show cli command is executed in the User Exec command mode.  
194) describes the parameters and variables for the show cli command.  
Table 59  
show cli command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
info  
Displays general Console settings.  
Displays CLI mode.  
mode  
password  
type  
Displays CLI user names and passwords.  
Displays password types.  
the show cli command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Customizing your system 195  
Figure 64  
show cli command output  
Displaying system information  
The show sys-info command displays the current system characteristics.  
ATTENTION  
You must have SNTP enabled and configured to display GMT time.  
The syntax for the show sys-info command is:  
show sys-info  
The show sys-info command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
The show sys-info command has no parameters or variables.  
output from the show sys-info command.  
Figure 65  
show sys-info command output  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
196 System configuration using the CLI  
Setting boot parameters  
You can reboot the switch and configure BootP. The topics covered in this  
section are:  
boot command  
The boot command performs a soft-boot of the switch. The syntax for  
the boot command is:  
boot [default]  
The boot command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command mode.  
the parameters and variables for the boot command.  
Table 60  
boot command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
default  
Restores switch to factory-default settings after  
rebooting.  
ATTENTION  
When you reset to factory defaults, the last reset count and reason for last reset  
will not be set to factory defaults.  
ip bootp server command  
The ip bootp server command configures BootP on the current  
instance of the switch or server. The syntax for the ip bootp server  
command is:  
ip bootp server {default-ip|last|disable|always}  
The ip bootp server command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
197) describes the parameters and variables for the ip bootp server  
command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Customizing your system 197  
Table 61  
ip bootp server command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
Specifies when to use BootP:  
last|needed|disable|al  
ways  
default-ip—use BootP or the default IP  
last—use BootP or the last known address  
disable—never use BootP  
always—Always use BootP  
no ip bootp server command  
The no ip bootp server command disables the BootP server. The  
syntax for the no ip bootp server command is:  
no ip bootp server  
The no ip bootp server command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The no ip bootp server command has no parameters or values.  
default ip bootp server command  
The default ip bootp server command sets the BootP server status  
to BootP or Default IP. The syntax for the default ip bootp server  
command is:  
default ip bootp server  
The default ip bootp server command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The default ip bootp server command has no parameters or values.  
Setting TFTP parameters  
You can display the IP address of the TFTP server, assign an IP address  
you want to use for a TFTP server, copy a configuration file to the TFTP  
server, or copy a configuration file from the TFTP server to the switch to use  
to configure the switch. This section covers:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
198 System configuration using the CLI  
show tftp-server command  
The show tftp-server command displays the IP address of the server  
used for all TFTP-related transfers. The syntax for the show tftp-server  
command is:  
show tftp-server  
The show tftp-server command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
The show tftp-server command has no parameters or variables.  
output of the show tftp-server command.  
Figure 66  
show tftp-server command output  
tftp-server command  
The tftp-server command assigns the address for the switch to use for  
TFTP services. The syntax of the tftp-server command is:  
tftp-server <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>  
The tftp-server command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
198) describes the parameters and variables for the tftp-server command.  
Table 62  
tftp-server command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
Enter the dotted-decimal IP address of the server you  
want to use for TFTP services.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Customizing your system 199  
no tftp-server command  
The no tftp-server command clears the TFTP server IP address to  
0.0.0.0. The syntax of the no tftp-server command is:  
no tftp-server  
The no tftp-server command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
The no tftp-server command has no parameters or values.  
default tftp-server command  
The default tftp-server command sets the TFTP server IP address  
to 0.0.0.0. The syntax of the default tftp-server command is:  
default tftp-server  
The default tftp-server command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The default tftp-server command has no parameters or values.  
copy config tftp command  
The copy config tftp command copies the current configuration file  
onto the TFTP server. The syntax for the copy config tftp command is:  
copy config tftp [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] filename <WORD>  
The copy config tftp command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
199) describes the parameters and variables for the copy config tftp  
command.  
Table 63  
copy config tftp command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
address <XXX.XXX.X Specifies the TFTP server IP address; enter in  
XX.XXX>  
dotted-decimal notation.  
filename <WORD>  
Specifies filename that you want to copy the  
configuration file onto the TFTP server. Enter the name  
you want the configuration file to have on the TFTP  
server.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
200 System configuration using the CLI  
copy tftp config command  
The copy tftp config command retrieves the system configuration file  
from the TFTP server and uses the retrieved information as the current  
configuration on the system.The syntax for the copy tftp config  
command is:  
copy tftp config [address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] filename <WORD>  
The copy tftp config command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
200) describes the parameters and variables for the copy tftp config  
command.  
Table 64  
copy tftp config command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
address <XXX.XXX.X Specifies the TFTP server IP address; enter in  
XX.XXX>  
dotted-decimal notation.  
filename <WORD>  
Enter the name of the configuration file you want to copy  
from the TFTP server.  
Customizing the opening banner  
You can customize the banner that appears when you connect to the  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series. You can customize the text that reads  
NORTEL. However you cannot customize the second line that reads Enter  
[Ctrl]+y to begin.  
The Banner Control feature provides an option to specify the banner text.  
If you choose not to display the banner, the system enters the command  
mode through the default command interface. You do not have to press  
the Ctrl+y keys.  
The Banner display that you select is used for subsequent console sessions.  
For executing the new mode in the console, you must logout. For Telnet  
access, all subsequent sessions use the selected mode.  
This section contains information about the following commands:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Customizing your system 201  
banner command for displaying banner  
The banner command for displaying banner specifies the banner displayed  
at startup; either static or custom. The syntax for the banner command  
to display banner is:  
banner [ custom | static | disabled | <1-19> LINE ]  
The banner command for displaying banner is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
parameters for the banner command.  
Table 65  
banner command parameters  
Parameters  
static  
Description  
Displays the default agent-banner.  
Displays the custom agent-banner.  
Skips the agent-banner display.  
custom  
disabled  
<1-19> LINE  
Fills the Nth line of the custom banner (1<N<19) with  
the text specified in LINE.  
show banner command  
The show banner command displays the banner. The syntax for the show  
banner command is:  
show banner [ custom | static ]  
The show banner command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
201) describes the parameters for the banner command.  
Table 66  
show banner command parameters and variables  
Parameters  
static  
Description  
Displays default banner  
Displays custom banner  
custom  
(if empty)  
Displays static, custom or disabled status if parameter  
is not entered.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
202 System configuration using the CLI  
no banner command  
The no banner command lets you clear all lines of a previously stored  
custom banner. The syntax for the no banner command is:  
no banner  
The no banner command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
Displaying the ARP table  
The show arp-table command displays the arp table of the device. The  
syntax for the show arp-table command is:  
show arp-table  
The show arp-table command is executed in the User Exec command  
mode.  
The show arp-table command has no parameters or variables.  
output of the show arp-table command.  
Figure 67  
show arp-table command output  
Displaying interfaces  
You can view the status of all interfaces on the switch, including MultiLink  
Trunk membership, link status, autonegotiation, and speed. This section  
contains information about the following:  
show interfaces command  
The show interfaces command displays the current configuration and  
status of all interfaces. The syntax for the show interfaces command is:  
show interfaces [names | gbic-info] [<portlist>]  
The show interfaces command is executed in the User Exec command  
mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Displaying interfaces 203  
203) describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces  
command.  
Table 67  
show interfaces command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
gbic-info  
LINE  
Displays gbic details.  
Displays the interface information for specific ports  
Displays the interface names.  
names  
verbose  
Displays information about STP and EAP.  
sample output of the show interfaces names command.  
Figure 68  
show interfaces names command output  
output of the show interfaces command without the names variable.  
Figure 69  
show interfaces command output  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
204 System configuration using the CLI  
The following figure shows a sample output of the show interfaces verbose  
command.  
Figure 70  
show interfaces verbose command output  
show interfaces config command  
The show interfaces config command displays the current  
operational status of interfaces and provides supplementary information  
about the current port settings for Spanning Tree Protocol.  
The syntax for the show interfaces config command is:  
show interfaces [<portlist>] config  
The show interfaces config command is executed in the Privileged  
EXEC command mode.  
(page 204) describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces  
config command.  
Table 68  
show interfaces config command parameters and variables  
Parameters  
and  
Description  
variables  
<portlist>  
Enter the ports you want to display.  
sample output of the show interfaces config command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Saving the configuration to NVRAM 205  
Figure 71  
show interfaces config command output  
Saving the configuration to NVRAM  
You can save your configuration parameters to Non-Volatile RAM (NVRAM)  
using any of the following CLI commands:  
copy config nvram command  
The copy config nvram command copies the current configuration to  
NVRAM. The syntax for the copy config nvram command is:  
copy config nvram  
The copy config nvram command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
The copy config nvram command has no parameters or variables.  
ATTENTION  
The system automatically issues the copy config nvram command  
periodically. See "Enabling and disabling autosave" (page 206) for details.  
write memory command  
The write memory command copies the current configuration to NVRAM.  
The syntax for the write memory command is:  
write memory  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
206 System configuration using the CLI  
The write memory command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
The write memory command has no parameters or variables.  
save config command  
The save config command copies the current configuration to NVRAM.  
The syntax for the save config command is:  
save config  
The save config command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command  
mode.  
The save config command has no parameters or variables.  
Enabling and disabling autosave  
The Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series performs a check every 60  
seconds to detect changes in the configuration file or a new log message  
in the nonvolatile storage. If any of these two events occurs, the switch  
automatically saves its configuration and the nonvolatile log to flash  
memory. Autosave also automatically saves your configuration information  
across reboots.  
You can enable or disable this feature. When you disable autosave, changes  
in the configuration file are not saved to the flash memory.  
This section contains information about the following commands:  
ATTENTION  
You can use the CLI command copy config nvram to force a manual save of  
the configuration when autosave is disabled.  
show autosave command  
The show autosave command displays the status of the autosave feature,  
either enabled or disabled. The syntax for the show autosave command  
is:  
show autosave  
The show autosave command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Enabling and disabling autosave 207  
The show autosave command has no parameters or variables.  
output from the show autosave command.  
Figure 72  
show autosave command output  
autosave enable command  
The autosave enable command enables the autosave feature. The  
syntax for the autosave enable command is:  
autosave enable  
The autosave enable command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
The autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.  
no autosave enable command  
The no autosave enable command disables the autosave feature. The  
syntax for the no autosave enable command is:  
no autosave enable  
The no autosave enable command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The no autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.  
default autosave enable command  
The default autosave enable command defaults the autosave feature  
to the default value of enabled. The syntax for the default autosave  
enable command is:  
default autosave enable  
The default autosave enable command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The default autosave enable command has no parameters or  
variables.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
208 System configuration using the CLI  
Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time  
Protocol  
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) feature synchronizes the  
Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) to an accuracy within 1 second. This  
feature adheres to the IEEE RFC 2030 (MIB is the s5agent). With this  
feature, the system can obtain the time from any RFC 2030-compliant  
NTP/SNTP server.  
ATTENTION  
If you have trouble using this feature, try various NTP servers. Some NTP servers  
may be overloaded or currently inoperable.  
show sntp command  
The show sntp command displays the SNTP information, as well as the  
configured NTP servers. The syntax for the show sntp command is:  
show sntp  
The show sntp command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command  
mode.  
The show sntp command has no parameters or variables.  
from the show sntp command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol 209  
Figure 73  
show sntp command output  
sntp enable command  
ATTENTION  
The default setting for SNTP is disabled.  
The sntp enable command enables SNTP. The syntax for the sntp  
enable command is:  
sntp enable  
The sntp enable command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
The sntp enable command has no parameters or variables.  
no sntp enable command  
The no sntp enable command disables SNTP. The syntax for the no  
sntp enable command is:  
no sntp enable  
The no sntp enable command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
The no sntp enable command has no parameters or variables.  
sntp server primary address command  
The sntp server primary address command specifies the IP  
addresses of the primary NTP server. The syntax for the sntp server  
primary address command is:  
sntp server primary address <A.B.C.D>  
The sntp server primary address command is executed in the  
Global Configuration command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
210 System configuration using the CLI  
(page 210) describes the parameters and variables for the sntp server  
primary address command.  
Table 69  
sntp server primary address command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
<A.B.C.D>  
Enter the IP address of the primary NTP server.  
The default is 0.0.0.0.  
sntp server secondary address command  
The sntp server secondary address command specifies the IP  
addresses of the secondary NTP server. The syntax for the sntp server  
secondary address command is:  
sntp server secondary address <A.B.C.D>  
The sntp server secondary address command is executed in the  
Global Configuration command mode.  
variables" (page 210) describes the parameters and variables for the sntp  
server secondary address command.  
Table 70  
sntp server secondary address command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
<A.B.C.D>  
Enter the IP address of the secondary NTP server.  
The default is 0.0.0.0.  
no sntp server command  
The no sntp server command clears the NTP server IP addresses. The  
syntax for the no sntp server command is:  
no sntp server <primary|secondary>  
The no sntp server command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
211) describes the parameters and variables for the no sntp server  
command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol 211  
Table 71  
no sntp server command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
<primary|secondary>  
Enter the NTP server you want to clear:  
primary—the IP address for the primary NTP  
server  
secondary—the IP address for the secondary NTP  
server  
sntp sync-now command  
The sntp sync-now command forces a manual synchronization with the  
NTP server.  
ATTENTION  
You must have SNTP enabled before this command can take effect.  
The syntax for the sntp sync-now command is:  
sntp sync-now  
The sntp sync-now command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
The sntp sync-now command has no parameters or variables.  
sntp sync-interval command  
The sntp sync-interval command specifies recurring synchronization  
with the NTP server in hours relative to initial synchronization. The syntax  
for the sntp sync-interval command is:  
sntp sync-interval <0-168>  
The sntp sync-interval command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
212) describes the parameters and variables for the sntp sync-interval  
command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
212 System configuration using the CLI  
Table 72  
sntp sync-interval command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
<0-168>  
Enter the number of hours you want for periodic  
synchronization with the NTP server.  
ATTENTION  
0 is boot-time only, and 168 is once a week; the default  
value is 24 hours.  
default sntp command  
The default sntp command sets the SNTP parameters to their default  
values. The syntax for the default sntp command is:  
default sntp [enable | server | sync-interval]  
The default sntp command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
212) describes the parameters and variables for the default sntp command.  
Table 73  
default sntp command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
enable  
Disables SNTP.  
server  
Clears stored SNTP server addresses.  
Restores the default SNTP re-synchronization interval.  
sync-interval  
Setting local time zone  
SNTP uses Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) for all time synchronizations  
so it is not affected by different time zones. In order for the switch report  
the correct time for your local time zone and daylight savings time, you  
must use the following commands:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting local time zone 213  
clock time-zone  
The clock time-zone command sets the local time zone relative to  
Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). The syntax for the clock time-zone  
command is:  
clock time-zone <zone> <hours> <minutes>  
The clock time-zone command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
213) describes the parameters and variables for the clock time-zone  
command.  
Table 74  
clock time-zone command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
zone  
Time zone acronym that can be displayed when showing  
system time (Range: Up to 4 characters)  
hours  
Hours difference from UTC. (Valid Range: –12 to +12)  
Optional minutes difference from UTC. (Range: 0–59)  
minutes  
no clock time-zone  
The no clock time-zone command disables the clock time zone  
feature. The syntax for the no clock time-zone command is:  
no clock time-zone  
The no clock time-zone command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The no clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.  
clock summer-time  
The clock summer-time command sets the daylight savings time with  
start and end dates. The syntax for the clock summer-time command is:  
clock summer-time <zone> [date {<day> <month> <year>  
<hh:mm>} {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>}] [<offset>]  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
214 System configuration using the CLI  
The clock summer-time command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
214) describes the parameters and variables for the clock summer-time  
command.  
Table 75  
clock summer-time command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
zone  
The acronym to display when summer time is in effect. If  
unspecified default to the time zone acronym. (Range: up  
to 4 characters)  
date {<day>  
The first date specifies when summer time should start  
and the second date specifies when summer time  
should end.  
<month> <year>  
<hh:mm>} {<day>  
<month> <year>  
<hh:mm>}  
• day: day of the month (Range: 1 to 31)  
• month: month (Range: first three letters by name)  
• hh:mm: time in military format, in hours and minutes  
ATTENTION  
<day> <month> parameters can also be entered in  
order: <month> <day>.  
offset  
Number of minutes to add during summer time (Range:  
-840 to 840).  
no clock summer-time  
The no clock summer-time command disables the daylight savings  
time feature. The syntax for the no clock summer-time command is:  
no clock summer-time  
The no clock summer-time command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The no clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.  
show clock time-zone  
The show clock time-zone command displays the local time zone  
settings. The syntax for the show clock time-zone command is:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Enabling Autopology 215  
show clock time-zone  
The show clock time-zone command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The show clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.  
from the show clock time-zone command.  
Figure 74  
show clock time-zone output  
show clock summer-time  
The show clock summer-time command displays the daylight savings  
time settings. The syntax for the show clock summer-time command is:  
show clock summer-time  
The show clock summer-time command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The show clock summer-time command has no parameters or  
variables.  
from the show clock summer-time command.  
Figure 75  
show clock summer-time  
Enabling Autopology  
You can enable the Optivity* Autopology* protocol using the CLI. See  
www.nortel.com/support for information on Autopology. (The product family  
for Optivity and Autotopology is Data and Internet.) This section covers the  
following commands:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
216 System configuration using the CLI  
autotopology command  
The autotopology command enables the Autotopology protocol. The  
syntax for the autotopology command is:  
autotopology  
The autotopology command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
The autotopology command has no parameters or values.  
no autotopology command  
The no autotopology command disables the Autotopology protocol. The  
syntax for the no autotopology command is:  
no autotopology  
The no autotopology command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
The no autotopology command has no parameters or values.  
default autotopology command  
The default autotopology command enables the Autotopology  
protocol. The syntax for the default autotopology command is:  
default autotopology  
The default autotopology command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
The default autotopology command has no parameters or values.  
show autotopology settings  
The show autotopology settings command displays information on  
the Autotopology configuration. The syntax for the  
show autotopology settings command is:  
show autotopology settings  
The show autotopology settings command is executed in the  
Privileged EXEC command mode.  
The show autotopology settings command has no parameters or  
variables.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring LLDP using the CLI 217  
a sample output of the show autotopology settings command.  
Figure 76  
show autotopology settings command output  
show autotopology nmm-table  
The show autotopology nmm-table command displays information  
about the network management module (NMM) table. The syntax for the  
show autotopology nmm-table command is:  
show autotopology nmm-table  
The show autotopology nmm-table command is executed in the  
Privileged EXEC command mode.  
The show autotopology nmm-table command has no parameters  
or variables.  
217) displays a sample output of the show autotopology nmm-table  
command.  
Figure 77  
show autotopology nmm-table command output  
Configuring LLDP using the CLI  
You can enable the LLDP using the CLI. For more information about LLDP,  
covers the following commands:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
218 System configuration using the CLI  
lldp command  
The lldp command sets the LLDP transmission parameters. The syntax  
for the lldp command is:  
lldp [tx-interval <5-32768>] [tx-hold-multiplier <2-10>]  
[reinit-delay <1-10>] [tx-delay <1-8192>]  
[notification-interval <5-3600>]  
The lldp command is executed in the Global Configuration command  
mode.  
the parameters and variables for the lldp command.  
Table 76  
lldp command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
tx-interval  
<5-32768>  
Sets the interval between successive transmission cycles.  
tx-hold-multiplier  
<2-10>  
Sets the multiplier for tx-interval used to compute the Time  
To Live value for the TTL TLV.  
reinit-delay  
<1-10>  
Sets the delay for re-initialization attempt if the adminStatus  
is disabled.  
tx-delay <1-8192 Sets the minimum delay between successive LLDP frame  
transmissions.  
>
notification-interva Sets the interval between successive transmissions of LLDP  
l <5-3600> notifications.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring LLDP using the CLI 219  
default lldp command  
The default lldp command sets the LLDP transmission parameters to  
their default values. The syntax for the default lldp command is:  
default lldp [tx-interval] [tx-hold-multiplier]  
[reinit-delay] [tx-delay] [notification-interval]  
If no parameters are specified, the default lldp command sets all  
parameters to their default values.  
The default lldp command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
219) describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp command.  
Table 77  
default lldp command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
tx-interval  
tx-hold-multiplier  
reinit-delay  
Sets retransmit interval to the default value (30).  
Sets transmission multiplier to the default value (4).  
Sets reinitialize delay to the default value (2).  
Sets transmission delay to the default value (2).  
tx-delay  
notification-interva Sets notification interval to the default value (5).  
l
lldp config-notification command  
The lldp config-notification command enables notification when  
new neighbor information is stored or when existing information is removed.  
The syntax for the lldp config-notification command is:  
lldp [port <portlist>] config-notification  
The lldp config-notification command is executed in the Interface  
Configuration command mode.  
220) describes the parameters and variables for the lldp config-notification  
command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
220 System configuration using the CLI  
Table 78  
lldp config-notification command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
<portlist>  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
no lldp config-notification command  
no lldp config-notification command disables config notification.  
The syntax for the no lldp config-notification command is:  
no lldp [port <portlist>] config-notification  
The no lldp config-notification command is executed in the  
Interface Configuration command mode.  
(page 220) describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp  
config-notification command.  
Table 79  
no lldp config-notification command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
<portlist>  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
default lldp config-notification command  
The default lldp config-notification command sets config  
notification to its default value (disabled). The syntax for the default  
lldp config-notification command is:  
default lldp [port <portlist>] config-notification  
The default lldp config-notification command is executed in  
the Interface Configuration command mode.  
(page 220) describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp  
config-notification command.  
Table 80  
default lldp config-notification command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
line <portlist>  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring LLDP using the CLI 221  
lldp tx-tlv command  
The lldp tx-tlv command specifies the optional TLVs to include in the  
transmitted LLDPDUs. The syntax for the lldp tx-tlv command is:  
lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [local-mgmt-addr] [port-desc]  
[sys-cap] [sys-desc] [sys-name]  
The lldp tx-tlv command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
221) describes the parameters and variables for the lldp tx-tlv command.  
Table 81  
lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
local-mgmt-addr  
port-desc  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
Local management address TLV  
Port description TLV  
sys-cap  
System capabilities TLV  
sys-desc  
System description TLV  
sys-name  
System name TLV  
no lldp tx-tlv command  
The no lldp tx-tlv command specifies the optional TLVs not to include  
in the transmitted LLDPDUs. The syntax for the lldp tx-tlv command is:  
no lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [local-mgmt-addr]  
[port-desc]  
[sys-cap] [sys-desc] [sys-name]  
The no lldp tx-tlv command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
221) describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp tx-tlv command.  
Table 82  
no lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
Local management address TLV  
local-mgmt-addr  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
222 System configuration using the CLI  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
port-desc  
sys-cap  
Port description TLV.  
System capabilities TLV  
System description TLV  
System name TLV  
sys-desc  
sys-name  
default lldp tx-tlv command  
The default lldp tx-tlv command specifies the optional TLVs not  
to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs (by default, the optional TLVs are  
not included in LLDPDUs). The syntax for the default lldp tx-tlv  
command is:  
default lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [local-mgmt-addr]  
[port-desc]  
[sys-cap] [sys-desc] [sys-name]  
The default lldp tx-tlv command is executed in the Interface  
Configuration command mode.  
222) describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp tx-tlv  
command.  
Table 83  
default lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
local-mgmt-addr  
Local management address TLV (default value is false: not  
included)  
port-desc  
sys-cap  
Port description TLV. (default value is false: not included)  
System capabilities TLV (default value is false: not included)  
System description TLV (default value is false: not included)  
System name TLV (default value is false: not included)  
sys-desc  
sys-name  
lldp status command  
The lldp status command sets the LLDPU transmit and receive status  
on ports. The syntax for the lldp status command is:  
lldp [port <portlist>] status [rxOnly | txAndRx | txOnly]  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring LLDP using the CLI 223  
The lldp status command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
223) describes the parameters and variables for the lldp status command.  
Table 84  
lldp status command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
Enables LLDPU receive only.  
rxOnly  
txAndRx  
txOnly  
Enables LLDPU transmit and receive.  
Enables LLDPU transmit only.  
no lldp status command  
The no lldp status command disables 802.1ab on ports. The syntax  
for the no lldp status command is:  
no lldp [port <portlist>] status  
The no lldp status command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
223) describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp status command.  
Table 85  
no lldp status command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
default lldp status command  
The default lldp status command sets the LLDPU transmit and  
receive status on specified ports to its default value (txAndRx). The syntax  
for the default lldp status command is:  
default lldp [port <portlist>] status  
The default lldp status command is executed in the Interface  
Configuration command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
224 System configuration using the CLI  
224) describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp status  
command.  
Table 86  
default lldp status command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
show lldp command  
The show lldp command displays configuration data for LLDP. The syntax  
for the show lldp command is:  
show lldp [local-sys-data] [mgmt-sys-data] [pdu-tlv-size]  
[stats]  
The show lldp command is executed in the User Exec command mode.  
224) describes the parameters and variables for the show lldp command.  
Table 87  
show lldp command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
local-sys-data  
mgmt-sys-data  
pdu-tlv-size  
stats  
Displays local LLDP system data.  
Displays LLDP management data.  
Displays 802.1ab tlv in pdu.  
Displays LLDP statistics.  
the output from the show lldp local-sys-data command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring LLDP using the CLI 225  
Figure 78  
show lldp local-sys-data command output  
the output from the show lldp mgmt-sys-data command.  
Figure 79  
show lldp mgmt-sys-data command output  
from the show lldp stats command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
226 System configuration using the CLI  
Figure 80  
show lldp stats command output  
show lldp port command  
The show lldp port command displays configuration data for LLDP  
ports. The syntax for the show lldp port command is:  
show lldp [port <portlist>] [neighbor] [neighbor-mgmt-addr]  
[rx-stats] [tx-stats] [tx-tlv]  
The show lldp port command is executed in the User Exec command  
mode.  
226) describes the parameters and variables for the show lldp port  
command.  
Table 88  
show lldp port command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
neighbor  
Specifies the ports affected by the command.  
Displays LLDP neighbors.  
neighbor-mgmt-addr  
rx-stats  
Displays LLDP management addresses for neighbors.  
Displays LLDP receive statistics.  
tx-stats  
Displays LLDP transmit statistics.  
tx-tlv  
Displays LLDP transmit TLVs.  
the output from the show lldp port neighbor command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring LLDP using the CLI 227  
Figure 81  
show lldp port neighbor command output  
227) displays the output from the show lldp port neighbor-mgmt-addr  
command.  
Figure 82  
show lldp port neighbor-mgmt-addr command output  
ATTENTION  
To display the neighbor management addresses using the show lldp port  
neighbor-mgmt-addr command, you must configure the connected port of the  
neighbor to transmit local management address TLVs (lldp tx-tlv [port  
<portlist>] local-mgmt-addr).  
output from the show lldp rx-stats command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
228 System configuration using the CLI  
Figure 83  
show lldp port rx-stats command output  
output from the show lldp tx-stats command.  
Figure 84  
show lldp port tx-stats command output  
output from the show lldp stats command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Upgrading software 229  
Figure 85  
show lldp port tx-tlv command output  
Configuring LEDs to blink on the display panel  
With the blink-leds command, you can set the LEDs on the display  
panel to blink to identify a particular unit. The syntax for the blink-leds  
command is:  
blink-leds [off | time <1-10>]  
The blink-leds command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command  
mode.  
Table 89  
blink-leds command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
off  
Sets the LEDs to stop blinking.  
time <1-10>  
Indicates the duration, in minutes, for the LEDs to blink  
in order to identify the unit.  
Upgrading software  
You can download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series software image  
that is located in nonvolatile flash memory. To download the Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series software image, a properly configured Trivial  
File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server must be present in your network, and  
the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series must have an IP address. To  
learn how to configure the switch IP address, see "Assigning and clearing  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
230 System configuration using the CLI  
CAUTION  
Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download  
process. A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image.  
This section contains information about the following:  
download command  
The download command upgrades the software for the Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500 Series. You can upgrade both the software image and the  
diagnostics image.  
ATTENTION  
The system resets after downloading a new image.  
The syntax for the download command is:  
download [address <ip>] {image <image-name>|image-if-newer  
<image-name>|diag <filename> [no-reset] | poe-module-image }  
The download command is executed in the Privileged EXEC command  
mode.  
ATTENTION  
You can use the download command without parameters. The system displays  
the most recently used TFTP server IP address and file name; if you still want to  
use these, press Enter. You can also change these.  
230) describes the parameters and variables for the download command.  
Table 90  
download command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
address <ip>  
Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server you want to  
use.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Upgrading software 231  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
ATTENTION  
If this parameter is omitted, the system goes to the  
server specified by the tftp-server command.  
image <image-na Enter the name of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
me>  
software image you want to download.  
image-if-newer  
<image-name>  
Enter the name of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
software image of the newer version you want to download.  
diag <filename>  
Enter the name of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
diagnostics image you want to download.  
no-reset  
Download the specified software without resetting the unit  
or stack.  
poe-module-imag Specifies the name of the PoE image file.  
e
The software download process automatically completes without user  
intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces  
it with a new software image. Take care not to interrupt the download  
process until after it runs to completion (the process can take up to 10  
minutes, depending on network conditions).  
When the download process is complete, the switch automatically resets  
and the new software image initiates a self-test. The system returns a  
message after successfully downloading a new image.  
Figure 86 "download message" (page 231) shows a sample output of the  
download command.  
Figure 86  
download message  
During the download process, the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series is  
not operational. You can monitor the progress of the download process  
by observing the LED indications.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
232 System configuration using the CLI  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
Ethernet port management using the  
CLI  
This chapter describes how to enable a port, name a port, and enable rate  
limiting. This chapter covers the following topics:  
Enabling or disabling a port  
You can enable or disable a port using the CLI. This section covers the  
following commands:  
shutdown command for the port  
The shutdown [port <portlist>] command disables the port.  
The syntax for the shutdown [port <portlist>] command is:  
shutdown [port <portlist>]  
234) describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown [line  
<portlist>] command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
234 Ethernet port management using the CLI  
Table 91  
shutdown port command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
line <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to shut down or disable.  
Enter the port numbers you want to disable.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
The shutdown [line <portlist>] command is executed in the  
Interface Configuration command mode.  
output from the shutdown [line <portlist>] command.  
ATTENTION  
You can disable switch ports that are trunk members, if you choose to disable  
them one by one. If you choose to disable all ports of the unit or stack, the  
changes can have effect on the ports belonging to MLTs.  
Figure 87  
shutdown port command output  
no shutdown command  
The no shutdown command enables the port. The syntax for the no  
shutdown command is:  
no shutdown [line <portlist>]  
The no shutdown command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
235) describes the parameters and variables for the no shutdown command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Naming ports 235  
Table 92  
no shutdown command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
line <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to enable. Enter the port  
numbers you want to disable.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
Naming ports  
You can name a port using the CLI. This section covers the following  
commands:  
name command  
The name command lets you name ports or to change the name. The  
syntax for the name command is:  
name [port <portlist>] <LINE>  
The name command is executed in the Interface Configuration command  
mode.  
the parameters and variables for the name command.  
Table 93  
name command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to name.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
236 Ethernet port management using the CLI  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
<LINE>  
Enter up to 26 alphanumeric characters.  
no name command  
The no name command clears the port names; it resets the field to an  
empty string. The syntax for the no name command is:  
no name [port <portlist>]  
The no name command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
236) describes the parameters and variables for the no name command.  
Table 94  
no name command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to clear of names.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
default name command  
The default name command clears the port names; it resets the field to  
an empty string. The syntax for the default name command is:  
default name [port <portlist>]  
The default name command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
237) describes the parameters and variables for the default name command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting port speed 237  
Table 95  
default name command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to clear of names.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
Setting port speed  
You can set the speed and duplex mode for a port. This section covers:  
speed command  
The speed command sets the speed of the port. The syntax for the speed  
command is:  
speed [port <portlist>] {10|100|1000|auto}  
The speed command is executed in the Interface Configuration command  
mode.  
the parameters and variables for the speed command.  
Table 96  
speed command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to configure the speed.  
Enter the port numbers you want to configure.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
238 Ethernet port management using the CLI  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
Sets speed to:  
10|100|1000|auto  
10—10 Mb/s  
100—100 Mb/s  
1000—1000 Mb/s or 1 GB/s  
auto—autonegotiation  
ATTENTION  
When you set the port speed for autonegotiation, ensure that the other side of  
the link is also set for autonegotiation.  
default speed command  
The default speed command sets the speed of the port to the factory  
default speed. The syntax for the default speed command is:  
default speed [port <portlist>]  
The default speed command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
238) describes the parameters and variables for the default speed  
command.  
Table 97  
default speed command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to set the speed to factory  
default. Enter the port numbers you want to set.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting port speed 239  
duplex command  
The duplex command specifies the duplex operation for a port. The syntax  
for the duplex command is:  
duplex [port <portlist>] {full|half|auto}  
The duplex command is executed in the Interface Configuration command  
mode.  
the parameters and variables for the duplex command.  
Table 98  
duplex command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port number to configure the duplex  
mode. Enter the port number you want to configure,  
or all to configure all ports simultaneously.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
Sets duplex to:  
full|half|auto  
full—full-duplex mode  
half—half-duplex mode  
auto—autonegotiation  
ATTENTION  
When you set the duplex mode for autonegotiation, ensure that the other side of  
the link is also set for autonegotiation.  
default duplex command  
The default duplex command sets the duplex operation for a port to  
the factory default duplex value. The syntax for the default duplex  
command is:  
default duplex [port <portlist>]  
The default duplex command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
240 Ethernet port management using the CLI  
240) describes the parameters and variables for the default duplex  
command.  
Table 99  
default duplex command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to reset the duplex mode  
to factory default values. Enter the port numbers  
you want to configure, or all to configure all ports  
simultaneously. The default value is autonegotiation.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
Enabling flow control  
If you use a Gigabit Ethernet with the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series,  
you control traffic on this port using the flowcontrol command. This  
section covers the following commands:  
flowcontrol command  
The flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports  
and controls the traffic rates during congestion. The syntax for the  
flowcontrol command is:  
flowcontrol [port <portlist>]  
{asymmetric|symmetric|auto|disable}  
The flowcontrol command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
241) describes the parameters and variables for the flowcontrol command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Enabling flow control 241  
Table 100  
flowcontrol command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to configure for flow  
control.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
Sets the mode for flow control:  
asymmetric|  
symmetric|  
auto|disable  
asymmetric—enables the local port to perform flow  
control on the remote port  
symmetric—enables the local port to perform flow  
control  
auto—sets the port to automatically determine the  
flow control mode (default)  
disable—disables flow control on the port  
no flowcontrol command  
The no flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports  
and disables flow control. The syntax for the no flowcontrol command  
is:  
no flowcontrol [port <portlist>]  
The no flowcontrol command is executed in the Interface Configuration  
command mode.  
242) describes the parameters and variables for the no flowcontrol  
command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
242 Ethernet port management using the CLI  
Table 101  
no flowcontrol command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
variables  
Description  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to disable flow control.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
default flowcontrol command  
The default flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet  
ports and sets the flow control to auto, which automatically detects the flow  
control. The syntax for the default flowcontrol command is:  
default flowcontrol [port <portlist>]  
The default flowcontrol command is executed in the Interface  
Configuration command mode.  
242) describes the parameters and variables for the default flowcontrol  
command.  
Table 102  
default flowconrtol command parameters and variables  
Parameters and  
Description  
variables  
port <portlist>  
Specifies the port numbers to default to auto flow  
control.  
ATTENTION  
If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port  
number you specified in the interface command.  
Enabling rate-limiting  
You can limit the percentage of multicast traffic, or broadcast traffic, or both  
using the CLI.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Enabling rate-limiting 243  
This section contains information about the following:  
show rate-limit command  
The show rate-limit command displays the rate-limiting settings and  
statistics. The syntax for the show rate-limit command is:  
show rate-limit  
The show rate-limit command is executed in the Privileged EXEC  
command mode.  
The show rate-limit command has no parameters or variables.  
output from the show rate-limit command.  
Figure 88  
show rate-limit command output  
rate-limit command  
The rate-limit command configures rate-limiting on the switch.  
The syntax for the rate-limit command is:  
rate-limit [multicast | broadcast | both] <0-262143>  
The rate-limit command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
244) describes the parameters and variables for the rate-limit command.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
244 Ethernet port management using the CLI  
Table 103  
rate-limit command parameters and variables  
Parameters and values Description  
Applies rate-limiting, in packets/second, to the  
specified type of traffic.  
multicast |  
broadcast | both  
<0-262143>  
multicast—applies rate-limiting to multicast  
packets  
broadcast—applies rate-limiting to broadcast  
packets  
both—applies rate-limiting to both multicast and  
broadcast packets  
no rate-limit command  
The no rate-limit command disables rate-limiting on the switch/stack.  
The syntax for the no rate-limit command is:  
no rate-limit  
The no rate-limit command is executed in the Global Configuration  
command mode.  
default rate-limit command  
The default rate-limit command restores the rate-limiting value  
for the switch/stack to the default setting. The syntax for the default  
rate-limit command is:  
default rate-limit  
The default rate-limit command is executed in the Global  
Configuration command mode.  
Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA)  
You can control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet  
Routing Switch as part of the auto-negotiation process using the Custom  
Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA) feature. When autonegotiation is  
disabled, the hardware is configured for a single (fixed) speed and duplex  
value. When auto-negotiation is enabled, the advertisement made by  
the switch is a constant value based upon all speed and duplex modes  
supported by the hardware. When auto-negotiating, the switch selects the  
highest common operating mode supported between it and its link partner.  
This section covers:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA) 245  
show auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
The show auto-negotiation-advertisements command displays  
the current autonegotiation advertisements. The syntax for the show  
auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:  
show auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]  
The show auto-negotiation-advertisements command is executed  
in the User Exec command mode.  
(page 245) describes the parameters and variables for the show  
auto-negotiation-advertisements command.  
Table 104  
show auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
Parameters and values  
Description  
port <portlist>  
Enter ports for which you want the current  
autonegotiation advertisements displayed.  
245) displays sample output from the show auto-negotiation-advertisements  
command.  
Figure 89  
show auto-negotiation-advertisements command output  
show auto-negotiation-capabilities command  
The show auto-negotiation-capabilities command displays the  
hardware advertisement capabilities for the switch. The syntax for the show  
auto-negotiation-capabilities command is:  
show auto-negotiation-capabilities [port <portlist>]  
The show auto-negotiation-capabilities command is executed  
in the User Exec command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
246 Ethernet port management using the CLI  
246) describes the parameters and variables for the show  
auto-negotiation-capabilities command.  
Table 105  
show auto-negotiation-capabilities command  
Parameters and values  
Description  
port <portlist>  
Enter ports for which you want the  
autonegotiation capabilities displayed.  
246) displays sample output from the show auto-negotiation-capabilities  
command.  
Figure 90  
show auto-negotiation-capabilities command output  
auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
The auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
configures advertisements for the switch. The syntax for the  
auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:  
auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>] [10-full]  
[10-half] [100-full] [100-half] [1000-full]  
[asymm-pause-frame] [pause-frame] [none]  
The auto-negotiation-advertisements command is executed in the  
Interface Configuration command mode.  
the parameters and variables for the auto-negotiation-advertisements  
command.  
Table 106  
auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
Parameters and values  
Description  
port <portlist>  
Enter ports for which you want to configure  
advertisements.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Enabling Custom Autonegotiation Advertisements (CANA) 247  
Parameters and values  
Description  
[10-full] [10-half]  
[100-full] [100-half]  
[1000-full]  
These are speed-duplex-pause settings. Any  
combination of these settings is allowed, but  
parameters must be given in the order shown.  
[asymm-pause-frame]  
[pause-frame]  
none  
Do not advertise any settings during  
auto-negotiation.  
no auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
The no auto-negotiation-advertisements command clears all  
advertisements for the switch. This command is used for testing. The syntax  
for the no auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:  
no auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]  
ATTENTION  
The use of this command affects traffic and brings down the link.  
The no auto-negotiation-advertisements command is executed  
in the Interface Configuration command mode.  
(page 247) describes the parameters and variables for the no  
auto-negotiation-advertisements command.  
Table 107  
no auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
Parameters and values  
Description  
port <portlist>  
Enter ports for which you want to clear all  
advertisements.  
default auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
The default auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
sets default advertisements for the switch. The syntax for the default  
auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:  
default auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]  
The default auto-negotiation-advertisements command is  
executed in the interface configuration command mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
248 Ethernet port management using the CLI  
(page 248) describes the parameters and variables for the default  
auto-negotiation-advertisements command.  
Table 108  
default auto-negotiation-advertisements command  
Parameters and values  
Description  
port <portlist>  
Enter ports for which you want to set default  
advertisements.  
This feature lets you customize the capabilities that you advertise. It also  
lets you control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet Routing  
Switch as part of the auto-negotiation process.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
249  
Configuring the switch using Device  
Manager  
This section describes how you can use Device Manager to configure your  
switch, manage SNTP, and display topology information.  
The section includes information on the following topics:  
Viewing Unit information  
You can view unit information by using the Unit dialog box.  
To open the Unit dialog box, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Double-click on a single unit or select the units you want to edit.  
Do one of the following:  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.  
On the toolbar, click Edit.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
250 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > Unit  
dialog box and details about each item on the tab.  
Unit tab  
To open the Unit tab:  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.  
The Unit dialog box appears with the Unit tab displayed.  
Figure 91  
Unit dialog box  
The following table describes the Unit tab fields.  
Table 109  
Unit tab fields  
Field  
Description  
Type  
Specifies the type of switch.  
Descr  
Description of switch.  
Ver  
Specifies the hardware version number of the switch.  
Specifies the serial number of the switch.  
Specifies the base number of ports.  
Specifies the total number of ports.  
Sernum  
BaseNumPorts  
TotalNumPorts  
Rate Limit tab  
To open the Rate Limit tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Viewing Unit information 251  
The Unit dialog box appears with the Unit tab displayed.  
2
Click the Rate Limit tab.  
The Rate limit tab appears.  
Rate Limit tab  
—End—  
The following table describes the Rate Limit tab fields.  
Table 110  
Rate Limit tab fields  
Field  
Description  
Traffic Type  
AllowedRatePps  
Specifies the traffic type.  
Allowed traffic rate packets/second. It is in the range  
of 0-262143 (0-3FFFFh).  
ATTENTION  
Rate Limiting feature is disabled when  
AllowedRatePps equals to 0.  
Enable  
When Enable is set to True, the TrafficType can either  
be multicast, broadcast, or both.  
ATTENTION  
You cannot set the Enabled field for both multicast  
and broadcast TrafficeType to False at the same  
time. This is illegal configuration.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
252 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Rear Ports Mode tab Use the JDM to configure the operational mode  
of the rear ports into standalone or Stacking Mode in the Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500 Series.  
Step Action  
1
2
From the JDM menu, select Edit > Unit. The Unit dialog box opens  
with the Unit tab displayed.  
Click the Rear Ports Mode tab. The Rear Ports Mode tab appears.  
Rear Ports Mode tab  
3
Select Standalone or Stacking Mode from the radio buttons to  
configure the operational mode of the rear ports.  
ATTENTION  
A switch reboot is required to the configured operational mode to take  
effect.  
—End—  
The following table describes the Rear Port Mode tab items.  
Table 111  
Rear Ports Mode tab fields  
Field  
Description  
Standalone: Select this radio button to  
RearPortAdminMode  
configure the operational mode of the rear  
ports to Standalone Mode.  
Stacking: Select this radio button to  
configure the operational mode of the rear  
ports to Stacking Mode.  
RearPortOperMode  
Displays the configured operational mode of the  
rear ports.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Viewing switch IP information 253  
Viewing switch IP information  
You can view the switch IP information using the IP dialog box.  
To open the IP dialog box, use the following procedure:  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.  
The Edit IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > IP  
dialog box and details about each item on the tab:  
Globals tab  
To open the Globals tab, use the following procedure:  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.  
The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
Figure 92  
Globals tab  
The following table describes the Globals tab fields.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
254 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Table 112  
Globals tab fields  
Field and MIB  
association  
Description  
DefaultTTL  
Default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of  
the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch,  
whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport  
layer protocol. Default value is 64.  
ReasmTimeout  
Maximum number of seconds that received fragments  
are held while they are awaiting reassembly by the  
switch. Default value is 60.  
Addresses tab  
The Addresses tab shows the IP address information for the device.  
To open the Addresses tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.  
The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the Addresses tab.  
The Addresses tab appears.  
Edit IP dialog box IP Address tab  
—End—  
The following table describes the Address tab fields.  
Table 113  
Addresses tab fields  
Field  
Description  
Addr  
The device IP address.  
The subnet mask address.  
NetMask  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Viewing switch IP information 255  
Field  
Description  
BcastAddr  
The value of the least-significant bit in the IP broadcast  
address used for sending datagrams on the (logical)  
interface associated with the IP address of this entry. For  
example, when the Internet standard all-ones broadcast  
address is used, the value is 1. This value applies to both  
the subnet and network broadcasts addresses used by the  
entity on this (logical) interface.  
ReasmMaxSize  
The size of the largest IP datagram that this entity can  
reassemble from incoming IP fragmented datagrams  
received on this interface.  
ARP tab  
The ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) tab shows the MAC addresses and  
the associated IP addresses for the switch.  
To open the ARP tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.  
The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the ARP tab.  
The ARP tab appears.  
Edit IP dialog box ARP tab  
—End—  
The following table describes the ARP tab fields.  
Table 114  
ARP tab fields  
Field  
Description  
Interface  
MacAddress  
The unit and port number.  
The unique hardware address of the device.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
256 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Field  
Description  
IpAddress  
The Internet Protocol address of the device used to represent a  
point of attachment in a TCP/IP internetwork.  
Type  
The type of mapping.  
TCP tab  
The TCP tab displays TCP information for the switch.  
To open the TCP tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.  
The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the TCP tab.  
The TCP tab appears.  
TCP tab  
The following table describes the TCP tab fields.  
Table 115  
TCP tab fields  
Field  
Description  
RtoAlgorithm  
The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used  
for retransmitting unacknowledged octets.  
RtoMin  
The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation  
for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds.  
RtoMax  
MaxConn  
The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation  
for the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds.  
The limit on the total number of TCP connections that  
the entity can support. In entities where the maximum  
number of connections is dynamic, this object contains  
the value -1.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Viewing switch IP information 257  
TCP Connections tab  
The TCP Connections tab displays information on the current TCP  
connections the switch maintains.  
To open the TCP Connections tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.  
The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the TCP Connections tab.  
The TCP Connections tab appears.  
The following table describes the TCP Connections tab fields.  
TCP Connections tab fields  
Field  
Description  
LocalAddress  
The local IP address for this TCP connection. In the  
case of a connection in the listen state, which is willing  
to accept connections for any IP interface associated  
with the node, the value 0.0.0.0 is used.  
LocalPort  
RemAddress  
RemPort  
State  
The local port number for this TCP connection.  
The remote IP address for this TCP connection.  
The remote port number for this TCP connection.  
The state of this TCP connection.  
—End—  
UDP Listeners tab  
The UDP Listeners tab displays information on the UDP listeners currently  
maintained by the switch.  
To open the UDP Listeners tab, use the following procedure:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
258 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.  
The IP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the UDP Listeners tab.  
The UDP Listeners tab appears.  
The following table describes the UDP Listeners tab fields.  
Table 116  
UDP Listeners tab fields  
Field  
Description  
LocalAddress  
The local IP address for this UDP listener. In the case  
of a UDP listener that accepts datagrams for any IP  
interface associated with the node, the value 0.0.0.0  
is used.  
LocalPort  
The local port number for this UDP listener.  
—End—  
Editing the chassis configuration  
You can edit a chassis configuration from the Edit Chassis dialog box.  
To open the Chassis dialog box, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the chassis.  
Do one of the following:  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Chassis.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing the chassis configuration 259  
The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > Chassis  
dialog box and details about each field on the tab.  
System tab  
You can use the System tab to specify tracking information for a device,  
device descriptions, and so on.  
To open the System tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the chassis.  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.  
The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed.  
Edit Chassis dialog box System tab  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
260 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
The following table describes the System tab fields.  
Table 117  
System tab fields  
Field  
Description  
sysDescr  
sysUpTime  
sysObjectID  
sysContact  
The assigned system description.  
The time since the system was last booted.  
The unique sysObjectID (OID) assigned to the device.  
Type the contact information (in this case, an e-mail  
address) for the system administrator.  
sysName  
Type the name of this device.  
Type the physical location of this device.  
The switch serial number.  
sysLocation  
SerNum  
AuthenticationTraps  
Click to enable or disable. When you enable, SNMP  
traps are sent to trap receivers for all SNMP access  
authentication. When you disable, no traps are received.  
To view traps, click the Trap toolbar button.  
ReBoot  
By default, the switch is in the Running mode. The  
reboot command initiates a hardware reset.  
AutoPVID  
Click to enable or disable. When you enable, AutoPVID  
is activated. When you disable, AutoPVID is inactivated.  
ManagementVlanId  
The current management VLAN ID.  
StackInsertionUnitNu  
mber  
This field specifies the unit number to be assigned to the  
next unit that joins the stack, when in stack mode.  
AutoUnitReplacement  
Enabled  
Click to enable or disable the auto-unit-replacement  
feature.  
NextBootMgmt  
Protocol  
The transport protocol(s) to use after the next boot of  
the agent.  
CurrentMgmtProtocol  
The current transport protocol(s) that the agent supports.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Editing the chassis configuration 261  
Field  
Description  
BootMode  
This setting determines how the management interface  
of the switch can be assigned an IP address, the next  
time the switch boots. The four BootMode options are:  
bootpDisabled - use the IP address contained in the  
configuration file.  
bootpAlways - always attempt to get an IP address  
from the network.  
bootpOrDefaultIP - attempt to get an IP address  
from the network only when one is not contained  
in the configuration file.  
bootpOrLastAddress - attempt to get an IP address  
from the network and if that fails use the IP address  
that was in use on this switch before the last reboot.  
ImageLoadMode  
The source from which the agent image is loaded at  
the next boot.  
CurrentImageVersion  
The version number of the agent image that is currently  
used on the switch.  
LocalStorageImage  
Version  
The version number of the agent image that is stored in  
flash memory on the switch.  
NextBootDefault  
Gateway  
The IP address of the default gateway for the agent to  
use after the next time the switch is booted.  
CurrentDefault  
Gateway  
The IP address of the default gateway that is currently  
in use.  
NextBootLoad  
Protocol  
The transport protocol to be used by the agent to load  
the configuration information and the image at the next  
boot.  
LastLoadProtocol  
The transport protocol last used to load the image and  
configuration information on the switch.  
Base Unit Info tab  
The Base Unit Info tab provides read-only information about the operating  
status of the hardware and whether or not the default factory settings are  
being used.  
To open the Base Unit Info tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the chassis.  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
262 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed.  
Click the Base Unit Info tab.  
3
The Base Unit Info tab appears.  
—End—  
The following table describes the Base Unit Info tab fields.  
Table 118  
Base Unit Info tab fields  
Field  
Type  
Descr  
Description  
The switch type.  
A description of the switch hardware, including number of  
ports and transmission speed.  
Ver  
The switch hardware version number.  
The switch serial number.  
SerNum  
LstChng  
The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered  
its current operational state. If the current state was  
entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network  
management subsystem, the value is zero.  
AdminState  
Administrative state of the switch. Select either enable  
or reset.  
ATTENTION  
In a stack configuration, Reset only resets the base unit.  
OperState  
Location  
RelPos  
The operational state of the switch.  
Type the physical location of the switch.  
The relative position of the switch.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Editing the chassis configuration 263  
Field  
Description  
BaseNumPorts  
TotalNumPorts  
IPAddress  
The number of base ports of the switch.  
The number of ports of the switch.  
The base unit IP address.  
Stack Info tab  
Like the Base Unit Info tab, the Stack Info tab provides read-only  
information about the operating status of the stacked switches and whether  
or not the default factory settings are being used.  
To open the Stack Info tab:  
Step Action  
1
2
Open the Edit Chassis screen in the manner detailed at the  
beginning of this section.  
Click the Stack Info tab. This tab is illustrated in "Edit Chassis  
Edit Chassis screen—Stack Info tab  
"Stack Info tab fields" (page 263) describes the Stack Info tab fields.  
Stack Info tab fields  
Field  
Description  
Descr  
A description of the component or  
subcomponent. If not available, the value is  
a zero length string.  
Location  
The geographic location of a component  
in a system modeled as a chassis,  
but possibly physically implemented  
with geographically separate devices  
connected together to exchange  
management information. Chassis  
modeled in this manner are sometimes  
referred to as virtual chassis. An example  
value is: 4th flr wiring closet in blg A.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
264 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Field  
Description  
ATTENTION  
1. This field is applicable only to  
components that can be found in  
either the Board or Unit groups. If the  
information is unavailable, for example,  
the chassis is not modeling a virtual  
chassis or component is not in Board or  
Unit group, the value is a zero length  
string.  
2. If this field is applicable and is not  
assigned a value through a SNMP  
SET PDU when the row is created, the  
value defaults to the value of the object  
s5ChasComSerNum.  
LstChng  
The value of sysUpTime when it was  
detected that the component/sub-component  
was added to the chassis. If this action has  
not occurred since the cold/warm start of the  
agent, then the value is zero.  
AdminState  
The state of the component or subcomponent.  
The values that are read-only are:  
other – currently in some other state  
notAvail – actual value is not available  
The possible values that can be read and  
written are:  
disable—disables operation  
enable—enables operation  
reset—resets component  
test—starts self test of component,  
with the result to be normal, warning,  
nonFatalErr, or fatalErr in object  
s5ChasComOperState The allowable  
(and meaningful) values are determined  
by the component type.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing the chassis configuration 265  
Field  
Description  
OperState  
The current operational state of the  
component. The possible values are:  
other--some other state  
notAvail--state not available  
removed--component removed  
disabled--operation disabled  
normal--normal operation  
resetInProg--reset in progress  
testing--doing a self test  
warning--operating at warning level  
nonFatalErr--operating at error level  
fatalErr--error stopped operation  
The allowable (and meaningful) values are  
determined by the component type.  
Ver  
The version number of the component or  
subcomponent. If not available, the value is  
a zero length string.  
SerNum  
The serial number of the component or  
subcomponent. If not available, the value is  
a zero length string.  
BaseNumPorts  
TotalNumPorts  
IpAddress  
The number of base ports of the component  
or subcomponent.  
The number of ports of the component or  
subcomponent.  
The IP address of the component or  
subcomponent.  
—End—  
Agent tab  
The Agent tab provides read-only information about the addresses that the  
agent software uses to identify the switch.  
To open the Agent tab, use the following procedure:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
266 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the chassis.  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.  
The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed.  
3
Click the Agent tab.  
The Agent tab appears.  
Edit Chassis dialog box Agent tab  
—End—  
The following table describes the Agent tab fields.  
Table 119  
Agent tab fields  
Field  
Description  
NextBootIpAddr  
The IP address to be used the next time the switch is  
booted.  
NextBootNetMask  
LoadServerAddr  
The subnet mask to be used the next time the switch  
is booted.  
The IP address of the load server for the configuration  
file and/or the image file. If not used, then the value is  
0.0.0.0.  
ImageFileName  
ValidFlag  
Name of the image file(s) currently associated with the  
interface. When the object is not used, the value is a  
zero length string.  
Indicates if the configuration and/or image file(s) were  
downloaded from this interface and if the file names  
have not been changed.  
BootRouterAddr  
MacAddr  
The IP address of the boot router for the configuration  
file and/or the image file.  
The MAC address of the switch.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Editing the chassis configuration 267  
PowerSupply tab  
The PowerSupply tab provides read-only information about the operating  
status of the switch power supplies.  
To open the PowerSupply tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the chassis.  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.  
The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed.  
3
Click the PowerSupply tab.  
The PowerSupply tab appears.  
Edit Chassis dialog box PowerSupply tab  
—End—  
The following table describes the PowerSupply tab fields.  
Table 120  
Power Supply tab fields  
Field  
Description  
Chassis  
Primary  
The operational state of the power supply. Possible values  
include:  
Power Supply  
other: Some other state.  
notAvail: State not available.  
removed: Component was removed.  
disabled: Operation disabled.  
normal: State is in normal operation.  
resetInProg: There is a reset in progress.  
testing: System is doing a self test.  
warning: System is operating at a warning level.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
268 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Field  
Description  
nonFatalErr: System is operating at error level.  
fatalErr: A fatal error stopped operation.  
notConfig: A module needs to be configured. The  
allowable values are determined by the component type.  
Fan tab  
The Fan tab provides read-only information about the operating status of  
the switch fans.  
To open the Fan tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
Select the chassis.  
2
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.  
The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed.  
3
Click the Fan tab.  
The Fan tab appears.  
Edit Chassis dialog box Fan tab  
—End—  
The following table describes the Fan tab fields.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing the chassis configuration 269  
Table 121  
Fan tab fields  
Field  
Description  
The operational state of the fan. Values include:  
Chassis Fan  
other: Some other state.  
notAvail: This state is not available.  
removed: Fan was removed.  
disabled: Fan is disabled.  
normal: Fan is operating in normal operation.  
resetInProg: A reset of the fan is in progress.  
testing: Fan is doing a self test.  
warning: Fan is operating at a warning level.  
nonFatalErr: Fan is operating at error level.  
fatalErr: An error stopped the fan operation  
notConfig: Fan needs to be configured. The allowable  
values are determined by the component type.  
Banner tab  
The Banner tab lets you specify banner display in TELNET. You can specify  
either the default banner or a custom banner.  
To open the Banner tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the chassis.  
From the main menu, choose Edit > Chassis.  
The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed.  
3
Click the Banner tab.  
The Banner tab appears.  
Edit Chassis dialog box Banner tab  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
270 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
—End—  
To set the default banner, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
In the Banner tab, click on the static radio button, and then click  
Apply. This resets the banner in Telnet to the default banner.  
To check that the default banner is set in Telnet:  
In the main menu, click on Device > Telnet.  
The Telnet window appears with the default banner displayed.  
—End—  
Figure 93  
Telnet window with default banner  
To disable the banner:  
In the Banner tab, click on the disabled radio button, and then click Apply.  
To check that the banner is disabled:  
In the main menu, click on Device > Telnet.  
The Telnet window appears without the banner.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing the chassis configuration 271  
Custom Banner tab  
The Custom Banner tab lets you specify the display for a custom banner  
in Telnet.  
To open the Custom Banner tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the chassis.  
From the main menu, choose Edit > Chassis.  
The Chassis dialog box appears with the System tab displayed.  
3
Click the Custom Banner tab.  
The Custom Banner tab appears.  
Edit Chassis dialog box Custom Banner tab  
—End—  
To create a Custom Banner, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
In the Banner tab, click on the custom radio button, and then click  
Apply.  
2
3
Click on the Custom Banner tab.  
In the Custom Banner tab, make the changes to the lines of the  
banner that you want to create, and click Apply. The custom banner  
is 19 lines high and can be up to 80 characters long.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
272 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
—End—  
Working with configuration files  
This chapter describes how you can view information and upload or  
download the configuration and image files.  
FileSystem dialog box  
To open the Edit FileSystem dialog box, use the following procedure:  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > File System.  
The FileSystem dialog box appears and displays the Config/Image/Diag  
tab.  
Figure 94  
FileSystem - Config/Image/Diag File tab dialog box  
272) describes the FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields.  
Table 122  
FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields  
Field  
Description  
LoadServerAddr  
The IP address of the load server for the configuration file  
and/or the image file. If not used, then the value is 0.0.0.0.  
BinaryConfigFileN Name of the configuration file currently associated with the  
ame  
interface. When not used, the value is a zero length string.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Working with configuration files 273  
Field  
Description  
ImageFileName  
Name of the image file(s) currently associated with the  
interface. When the object is not used, the value is a zero  
length string.  
FwFileName  
(Diagnostics)  
Specifies the FWFileName.  
This object is used to download or upload a config file,  
an image file or diag firmware file. In read operation, if  
there is no action taken since the boot up, it returns with  
a value of other. Otherwise, it returns the latest action.  
Action  
In a write operation, the values that can be written are:  
dnldConfig  
dnldImg  
upIdConfig  
dnldFw  
dnldImgIfNewer  
dnldImgNoReset  
dnldFwNoReset  
The newly downloaded config, image or diag file cannot  
take effect until the next boot cycle of the device.  
Status  
This object is used to get the status of the latest action as  
shown by s5AgInfoFileAction. The values that can be read  
are:  
other—if no action taken since the boot up  
inProgress—the operation is in progress  
success—the operation succeeds  
fail—the operation failed  
ASCII config file  
To display the ASCII Config file tab, use the following procedure:  
In the File System dialog box, click on the ASCII Config File tab.  
The ASCII Config File tab appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
274 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Figure 95  
File system - ASCII Config File dialog box  
Config File tab fields.  
Table 123  
ASCII Config File tab fields  
Field  
Description  
LoadServerAddr  
The IP address of the load server for the ASCII configuration  
file. If not used, then the value is 0.0.0.0.  
ASCIIConfigFileName  
Name of the ASCII configuration file currently associated with  
the interface. When not used, the value is a zero length string.  
ASCIIConfigAutoDownload  
ASCIIConfigAutodldStatus  
Specifies automatic ASCII configuration download.  
Specifies the current status of the ASCII configuration file  
download.  
ASCIIConfigManualDownload  
ASCIIConfigManualdldStatus  
Specifies manual download of an ASCII configuration file.  
Specifies the current status of the manual download of an ASCII  
configuration file.  
ASCIIConfigManualUpload  
Specifies manual upload of an ASCII configuration file.  
ASCIIConfigManualUpldStatus  
Specifies the current status of the manual upload of an ASCII  
configuration file.  
Save Configuration tab  
You can use the Save Configuration tab to save the switch configuration  
to NVRAM.  
To open the Save Configuration tab, use the following procedure:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Working with configuration files 275  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > File System.  
The FileSystem dialog box appears with the Config/Image/Diag  
tab displayed.  
2
Click the Save Configuration tab.  
The Save Configuration tab appears.  
Figure 96  
Save Config tab  
The following table describes the Save Configuration tab fields.  
Table 124  
Save Configuration tab fields  
Field  
Description  
AutoSavetoNvramEnabled  
Action  
Enables or disables autosave on the switch.  
Select the copyConfigToNvram option to save the switch  
configuration to NVRAM (and click Apply).  
Status  
This field displays the status of the copyConfigToNvram action.  
Possible values are:  
other—no action has been taken since switch boot  
inProgress—the operation is in progress  
success—the operation succeeded  
fail—the operation failed  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
276 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Working with SNTP  
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) feature synchronizes the  
Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) to an accuracy within 1 second. This  
feature adheres to the IEEE RFC 2030 (MIB is the s5agent). With this  
feature, the system can obtain the time from any RFC 2030-compliant  
NTP/SNTP server.  
The system retries connecting with the NTP server a maximum of 3 times,  
with 5 minutes between each retry. If the connection fails after the 3  
attempts, the system waits for the next synchronization time (the default is  
24 hours) and begins the process again.  
Configuring SNTP  
The SNTP_Clock dialog box contains the parameters for configuring Simple  
Network Time Protocol (SNTP).  
To open the SNTP_clock dialog box, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the Main Menu, choose Edit > SNTP/Clock.  
The SNTP_Clock dialog box appears. Select the Simple Network  
Time Protocol tab.  
—End—  
Figure 97  
SNTP_Clock dialog box  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Working with SNTP 277  
The following table describes the SNTP dialog box fields.  
Table 125  
SNTP_Clock dialog box fields  
Field  
Description  
Primary  
Server  
The IP address of the primary SNTP server.  
Address  
Secondary  
Server  
The IP address of the secondary SNTP server.  
Address  
State  
Controls whether the device uses the Simple Network Time  
Protocol (SNTP), to synchronize the device’s clock to the  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If the value is disabled, the  
device cannot synchronize its clock using SNTP.  
If the value is unicast, the device synchronizes shortly after boot  
time when network access becomes available, and periodically  
thereafter.  
SyncInterval  
Controls the frequency, in hours, that the device attempts to  
synchronize with the NTP servers.  
ManualSync  
Request  
Specifies that the device to immediately attempt to synchronize  
with the NTP servers.  
LastSync  
Time  
Specifies the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) when the  
device last synchronized with an NTP server.  
LastSync  
Source  
Specifies the IP source address of the NTP server with which  
this device last synchronized  
NextSync  
Time  
Specifies the the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) at which  
the next synchronization is scheduled.  
PrimaryServe Specifies the number of times the switch failed to synchronize  
r Synch  
Failures  
with the primary server address. However, synchronization with  
the secondary server address may still occur.  
Seconda  
ryServer  
Specifies the number of times the switch failed to synchronize  
with the secondary server address,  
SynchFailures  
CurrentTime  
Specifies the switch’s current Coordinated Universal Time  
(UTC).  
ATTENTION  
In order to clear out the PrimaryServerAddress and SecondaryServerAddress,  
you must first set the State to disabled.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
278 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Configuring local time zone using the device manager  
You can set the local time zone on the ERS 2500 using Time Zone tab. Use  
the following procedure to set the local time zone.  
Step Action  
1
2
From the Edit menu, choose SNTP/Clock. The SNTP_Clock dialog  
box appears.  
Click theTime Zone tab. The Time Zone tab appears.  
3
4
Seect the time zone offset in the TimeZone box.  
Click Apply.  
—End—  
Configuring daylight savings time using the device manager  
You can set daylight saving start and end time using the on the ERS 2500  
using Daylight Saving Time tab. Use the following procedure to set daylight  
saving start and end time.  
Step Action  
1
2
From the Edit menu, choose SNTP/Clock. The SNTP_Clock dialog  
box appears.  
Click the Daylight Saving Time tab. The Daylight Saving Time  
tab appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Displaying topology information using Device Manager 279  
3
4
Type the number of minutes to shift the clock in the Offset box.  
Select the StartYear, StartMonth, StartDate, StartHour, and type  
the StartMinutes to define when to switch the clock to daylight  
saving time.  
5
Select the EndYear, EndMonth, EndDate, EndHour, and type the  
EndMinutes (if applicable) to define when to switch the clock back  
to normal time. If you want to keep the same daylight saving time  
changeover dates, you can set the EndYear to a year in the future.  
6
7
Click Enabled to enable daylight savings time.  
Click Apply.  
—End—  
Displaying topology information using Device Manager  
This section describes diagnostic information available in Device Manager  
on the following tabs:  
Topology tab  
To view topology information, use the following procedure:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
280 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
From the Device Manager menu bar, select Edit > Diagnostics > Topology.  
The Toplogy dialog box appears with the Topology tab displayed.  
Figure 98  
Diagnostics dialog box Topology tab  
Table 126 "Topology tab fields" (page 280) describes the Topology tab fields.  
Table 126  
Topology tab fields  
Field  
Description  
IpAddr  
Status  
The IP address of the device.  
Whether Nortel topology is on (topOn) or off (topOff) for the  
device. The default value is topOn.  
NmmLstChg  
The value of sysUpTime the last time an entry in the network  
management MIB (NMM) topology table was added, deleted,  
or modified. If the table has not changed since the last cold  
or warm start of the agent.  
NmmMaxNum  
NmmCurNum  
The maximum number of entries in the NMM topology table.  
The current number of entries in the NMM topology table.  
Topology Table tab  
To view more topology information, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
Topology.  
The Topology dialog box appears with the Topology tab displayed.  
Click the Topology Table tab.  
The Topology Table tab appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 281  
Figure 99  
Diagnostics dialog box Topology Table tab  
—End—  
The following table describes the Topology Table tab fields.  
Table 127  
Topology Table tab fields  
Field  
Description  
Slot  
The slot number in the chassis in which the topology message  
was received.  
Port  
The port on which the topology message was received.  
The IP address of the sender of the topology message.  
IpAddr  
SegId  
The segment identifier of the segment from which the remote  
agent sent the topology message. This value is extracted from  
the message.  
MacAddr  
The MAC address of the sender of the topology message.  
The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message.  
ChassisType  
BkplType  
The backplane type of the device that sent the topology  
message.  
LocalSeg  
CurState  
Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same  
Ethernet segment as the reporting agent.  
The current state of the sender of the topology message. The  
choices are:  
topChanged—Topology information has recently changed.  
heartbeat—Topology information is unchanged.  
new—The sending agent is in a new state.  
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager  
Use the following tabs to configure LLDP properties for local and neighbor  
systems:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
282 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
LLDP Globals tab  
With the Globals tab, you can configure LLDP transmit properties and view  
remote table statistics.  
Use the following procedure to open the Globals tab:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
Figure 100  
LLDP Globals tab  
The following table describes the Globals tab fields.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 283  
Table 128  
LLDP Globals tab fields  
Field  
Description  
lldpMessageTxInterval  
The interval (in seconds) at which LLDP  
frames are transmitted on behalf of this  
LLDP agent.  
lldpMessageTx  
HoldMultiplier  
The time-to-live value expressed as  
a multiple of the object. The actual  
time-to-live value used in LLDP frames,  
transmitted on behalf of this LLDP agent,  
is expressed by the following formula:  
TTL = min(65535, (lldpMessageTxInterval  
*lldpMessageTxHoldMultiplier))  
For example, if the value of  
lldpMessageTxInterval is 30, and  
the value of lldpMessageTxHoldMultiplier  
is 4, the value 120 is encoded in the TTL  
field in the LLDP header.  
lldpReinitDelay  
lldpTxDelay  
The lldpReinitDelay indicates the delay  
(in seconds) from when the LLDP Port  
AdminStatus of a particular port is disabled  
until reinitialization begins.  
The lldpTxDelay indicates the delay (in  
seconds) between successive LLDP  
frame transmissions initiated by value or  
status changes in the LLDP local systems  
MIB. The recommended value for the  
lldpTxDelay is set by the following formula:  
1 <= lldpTxDelay <= (0.25 *  
lldpMessageTxInterval)  
lldpNotificationInterval  
This object controls the transmission  
of LLDP notifications. The agent  
must not generate more than one  
lldpRemTablesChange notification-event  
in the indicated period, where a  
notification-event is the "transmission of  
a single notification PDU type to a list  
of notification destinations." If additional  
changes in lldpRemoteSystemsData  
object groups occur within the indicated  
throttling period, these trap-events must  
be suppressed by the agent. An NMS  
must periodically check the value of  
lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to  
detect any missed lldpRemTablesChange  
notification-events, for example, due to  
throttling or transmission loss. If notification  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
284 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Field  
Description  
transmission is enabled for particular ports,  
the suggested default throttling period is  
5 seconds.  
RemTablesLast  
ChangeTime  
The value of the sysUpTime object  
(defined in IETF RFC 3418) at the  
time an entry is created, modified, or  
deleted in tables associated with the  
lldpRemoteSystemsData objects, and  
all LLDP extension objects associated  
with remote systems. An NMS can  
use this object to reduce polling of the  
lldpRemoteSystemsData objects.  
RemTablesInserts  
The number of times the complete  
set of information advertised by a  
particular MSAP is inserted into tables  
contained in lldpRemoteSystemsData and  
lldpExtensions objects. The complete set  
of information received from a particular  
MSAP is inserted into related tables. If  
partial information cannot be inserted  
for a reason such as lack of resources,  
all of the complete set of information is  
removed. This counter is incremented only  
once after the complete set of information  
is successfully recorded in all related  
tables. Any failures occurring during  
insertion of the information set, which  
result in deletion of previously inserted  
information, do not trigger any changes  
in lldpStatsRemTablesInserts because  
the insert is not completed yet or in  
lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes, because the  
deletion is only a partial deletion. If the  
failure is the result of a lack of resources,  
the lldpStatsRemTablesDrops counter is  
incremented once.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 285  
Field  
Description  
RemTablesDeletes  
The number of times the complete  
set of information advertised by a  
particular MSAP is deleted from tables  
contained in lldpRemoteSystemsData and  
lldpExtensions objects. This counter is  
incremented only once when the complete  
set of information is completely deleted  
from all related tables. Partial deletions,  
such as a deletion of rows associated  
with a particular MSAP, from some tables,  
but not from all tables, are not allowed,  
and thus, do not change the value of this  
counter.  
RemTablesDrops  
The number of times the complete set  
of information advertised by a particular  
MSAP can not be entered into tables  
contained in lldpRemoteSystemsData  
and lldpExtensions objects because of  
insufficient resources.  
RemTablesAgeouts  
The number of times the complete  
set of information advertised by a  
particular MSAP is deleted from tables  
contained in lldpRemoteSystemsData  
and lldpExtensions objects because the  
information timeliness interval has expired.  
This counter is incremented only once  
when the complete set of information is  
completely invalidated (aged out) from all  
related tables. Partial aging, similar to  
deletion case, is not allowed, and thus,  
does not change the value of this counter.  
—End—  
Port tab  
With the Port tab, you can set the optional TLVs to include in the LLPDUs  
transmitted by each port.  
Use the following procedure to open the Port tab:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
286 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
2
Click the Port tab.  
The Port tab appears.  
Figure 101  
LLDP Port tab  
The following table describes the Port tab fields.  
Table 129  
Port tab fields  
Field  
Description  
PortNum  
AdminStatus  
Port number.  
The administratively desired status of the local  
LLDP agent:  
txOnly: the LLDP agent transmits LLDP  
frames on this port and does not store any  
information about the remote systems to  
which it is connected.  
rxOnly: the LLDP agent receives but does  
not transmit LLDP frames on this port.  
txAndRx: the LLDP agent transmits and  
receives LLDP frames on this port.  
disabled: the LLDP agent does not  
transmit or receive LLDP frames on this  
port. If the port receives remote systems  
information which is stored in other tables  
before AdminStatus is disabled, the  
information ages out.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 287  
Field  
Description  
NotificationEnable  
Controls, on a per-port basis, whether  
notifications from the agent are enabled.  
true: indicates that notifications are  
enabled  
false: indicates that notifications are  
disabled.  
TLVsTxEnable  
Sets the optional Management TLVs to be  
included in the transmitted LLDPDUs:  
portDesc: Port Description TLV  
sysName: System Name TLV  
sysDesc: System Description TLV  
sysCap: System Capabilities TLV  
ATTENTION  
The Local Management tab controls  
Management Address TLV transmission.  
—End—  
TX Stats tab  
With the TX Stats tab, you can view LLDP transmit statistics by port.  
Use the following procedure to open the TX Stats tab:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the TX Stats tab.  
The TX Stats tab appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
288 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Figure 102  
TX Stats tab  
The following table describes the TX Stats tab fields.  
Table 130  
TX Stats tab fields  
Field  
Description  
PortNum  
FramesTotal  
port number  
the number of LLDP frames transmitted by  
this LLDP agent on the indicated port  
—End—  
Graphing LLDP transmit statistics  
Use the following procedure to graph LLDP transmit statistics:  
Step Action  
1
2
From the TX Stats tab, select the port for which you want to display  
statistics.  
Click Graph.  
The TX Stats – Graph dialog box appears.  
3
4
Highlight a data column to graph.  
Click one of the graph buttons.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 289  
RX Stats tab  
With the RX Stats tab, you can view LLDP receive statistics by port.  
Use the following procedure to open the RX Stats tab:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the RX Stats tab.  
The RX Stats tab appears.  
Figure 103  
RX Stats tab  
The following table describes the RX Stats tab fields.  
Table 131  
RX Stats tab fields  
Field  
Description  
PortNum  
Port number.  
FramesDiscardedTotal  
The number of LLDP frames received on  
the port and discarded for any reason. This  
counter provides an indication that LLDP  
header formatting problems exist with the  
local LLDP agent in the sending system,  
or that LLDPDU validation problems exist  
with the local LLDP agent in the receiving  
system.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
290 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Field  
Description  
FramesErrors  
The number of invalid LLDP frames  
received on the port, while the LLDP agent  
is enabled.  
FramesTotal  
The number of valid LLDP frames received  
on the port, while the LLDP agent is  
enabled.  
TLVsDiscardedTotal  
The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for  
any reason.  
TLVsUnrecognizedTotal  
The number of LLDP TLVs received on  
a given port that are not recognized by  
this LLDP agent on the indicated port.  
An unrecognized TLV is referred to as  
the TLV whose type value is in the range  
of reserved TLV types (000 1001 - 111  
1110) in Table 9.1 of IEEE 802.1AB-2004.  
An unrecognized TLV can be a basic  
management TLV from a later LLDP  
version.  
AgeoutsTotal  
This counter represents the number of  
age-outs that occurred on a given port.  
An age-out is "the number of times the  
complete set of information advertised by  
a particular MSAP is deleted from tables  
contained in lldpRemoteSystemsData  
and lldpExtensions objects because  
the information timeliness interval has  
expired." This counter is similar to  
lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts, except that  
it is on a per-port basis. This enables  
NMS to poll tables associated with the  
lldpRemoteSystemsData objects and all  
LLDP extension objects associated with  
remote systems on the indicated port only.  
This counter is set to zero during agent  
initialization. When the admin status for  
a port changes from disabled to rxOnly,  
txOnly or txAndRx, the counter associated  
with the same port is reset to 0. The agent  
also flushes all remote system information  
associated with the same port. This  
counter is incremented only once when the  
complete set of information is invalidated  
(aged out) from all related tables on a  
particular port. Partial aging is not allowed,  
and thus, does not change the value of  
this counter.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 291  
—End—  
Graphing LLDP receive statistics  
Use the following procedure to graph LLDP receive statistics:  
Step Action  
1
2
From the RX Stats tab, select the port for which you want to display  
statistics.  
Click Graph.  
The RX Stats – Graph dialog box appears.  
3
4
Highlight a data column to graph.  
Click one of the graph buttons.  
—End—  
Local System tab  
With the Local System tab, you can view LLDP properties for the local  
system.  
Use the following procedure to open the Local System tab:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Select Local System.  
The Local System tab appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
292 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Figure 104  
Local System tab  
The following table describes the Local System tab fields.  
Table 132  
Local System tab fields  
Field  
Description  
ChassisIdSubtype  
the type of encoding used to identify the  
local system chassis:  
chassisComponent  
interfaceAlias  
portComponent  
macAddress  
networkAddress  
interfaceName  
local  
ChassisId  
chassis ID  
SysName  
local system name  
local system description  
SysDesc  
SysCapSupported  
identifies the system capabilities supported  
on the local system  
SysCapEnabled  
identifies the system capabilities that are  
enabled on the local system  
—End—  
Local Port tab  
With the Local Port tab, you can view LLDP port properties for the local  
system.  
Use the following procedure to open the Local Port tab:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 293  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the Local Port tab.  
The Local Port tab appears.  
Figure 105  
Local Port tab  
The following table describes the Local Port tab fields.  
Table 133  
Local Port tab fields  
Field  
Description  
PortNum  
PortIdSubtype  
Port number.  
The type of port identifier encoding used in  
the associated PortId object.  
interfaceAlias  
portComponent  
macAddress  
networkAddress  
interfaceName  
agentCircuitId  
local.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
294 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Field  
Description  
PortId  
The string value used to identify the port  
component associated with a given port in  
the local system.  
PortDesc  
The string value used to identify the 802  
LAN station port description associated  
with the local system. If the local agent  
supports IETF RFC 2863, the PortDesc  
object has the same value as the ifDescr  
object.  
—End—  
Local Management tab  
With the Local Management tab, you can view LLDP management  
properties for the local system.  
Use the following procedure to open the Local Management tab:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the Local Management tab.  
The Local Management tab appears.  
Figure 106  
Local Management tab  
The following table describes the Local Management tab fields.  
Table 134  
Local Management tab fields  
Field  
Description  
AddrSubtype  
The type of management address identifier  
encoding used in the associated Addr  
object.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 295  
Field  
Description  
Addr  
The string value used to identify the  
management address component  
associated with the local system. This  
address is used to contact the management  
entity.  
AddrLen  
The total length of the management  
address subtype and the management  
address fields in LLDPDUs transmitted by  
the local LLDP agent. The management  
address length field is needed so  
that the receiving systems that do not  
implement SNMP are not required to  
implement an iana family numbers/address  
length equivalency table to decode the  
management address.  
AddrIfSubtype  
Identifies the numbering method used to  
define the interface number associated  
with the remote system.  
unknown  
ifIndex  
systemPortNumber  
AddrIfId  
The integer value used to identify the  
interface number of the management  
address component associated with the  
local system.  
AddrOID  
The value used to identify the type of  
hardware component or protocol entity  
associated with the management address  
advertised by the local system agent.  
AddrPortsTxEnable  
Identifies the ports on which the local  
system management address TLVs are  
transmitted in the LLPDUs.  
—End—  
Neighbor tab  
With the Neighbor tab, you can view LLDP properties for the remote system.  
Use the following procedure to open the Neighbor tab:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
296 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the Neighbor tab.  
The Neighbor tab appears.  
Figure 107  
Neighbor tab  
The following table describes the Neighbor tab fields.  
Neighbor tab fields  
Field  
Description  
TimeMark  
The TimeFilter for this entry.  
See the TimeFilter textual convention  
in IETF RFC 2021 for details about  
TimeFilter.  
LocalPortNum  
Index  
Identifies the local port on which the remote  
system information is received.  
An arbitrary local integer value used  
by this agent to identify a particular  
MSAP. An agent is encouraged to assign  
monotonically increasing index values to  
new entries, starting with one, after each  
reboot.  
ChassisIdSubtype  
The type of encoding used to identify the  
remote system chassis:  
chassisComponent  
interfaceAlias  
portComponent  
macAddress  
networkAddress  
interfaceName  
local.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 297  
Field  
Description  
ChassisId  
Remote chassis ID.  
SysCapSupported  
Identifies the system capabilities supported  
on the remote system.  
SysCapEnabled  
Identifies the system capabilities that are  
enabled on the remote system.  
SysName  
Remote system name.  
SysDesc  
Remote system description.  
PortIdSubtype  
The type of encoding used to identify the  
remote port.  
interfaceAlias  
portComponent  
macAddress  
networkAddress  
interfaceName  
agentCircuitId  
local  
PortId  
Remote port ID.  
PortDesc  
Remote port description.  
—End—  
Neighbor Mgmt Address tab  
With the Neighbor Mgmt Address tab, you can view LLDP management  
properties for the remote system.  
Use the following procedure to open the Neighbor Mgmt Address tab:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the Neighbor Mgmt Address tab.  
The Neighbor Mgmt Address tab appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
298 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Figure 108  
Neighbor Mgmt Address tab  
The following table describes the Neighbor Mgmt Address tab fields.  
Table 135  
Neighbor Mgmt Address tab fields  
Field  
Description  
TimeMark  
LocalPortNum  
The TimeFilter for this entry.  
Identifies the local port on which the remote  
system information is received.  
Index  
An arbitrary local integer value used  
by this agent to identify a particular  
MSAP. An agent is encouraged to assign  
monotonically increasing index values to  
new entries, starting with one, after each  
reboot.  
AddrSubtype  
Addr  
The type of encoding used in the  
associated Addr object.  
The management address associated with  
the remote system.  
AddrIfSubtype  
Identifies the numbering method used to  
define the interface number associated  
with the remote system.  
unknown  
ifIndex  
systemPortNumber  
AddrIfId  
The integer value used to identify the  
interface number of the management  
address component associated with the  
remote system.  
AddrOID  
The value used to identify the type of  
hardware component or protocol entity  
associated with the management address  
advertised by the remote system agent.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 299  
Unknown TLV tab  
With the Unknown TLV tab, you can view details about unknown TLVs  
received on the local system.  
Use the following procedure to open the Unknown TLV tab:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the Unknown TLV tab.  
The Unkown TLV tab appears.  
Unknown TLV tab  
The following table describes the Unknown TLV tab fields.  
Table 136  
Unknown TLV tab fields  
Field  
Description  
TimeMark  
LocalPortNum  
The TimeFilter for this entry.  
Identifies the local port on which the remote  
system information is received.  
Index  
An arbitrary local integer value used  
by this agent to identify a particular  
MSAP. An agent is encouraged to assign  
monotonically increasing index values to  
new entries, starting with one, after each  
reboot.  
UnknownTLVType  
UnknownTLVInfo  
The value extracted from the type field of  
the unknown TLV.  
The value extracted from the value field of  
the unknown TLV.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
300 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Organizational Defined Info tab  
With the Organizational Defined Info tab, you can view organizationally  
specific properties for the remote system.  
Use the following procedure to open the Organizational Defined Info tab:  
Step Action  
1
From the Device Manager menu bar, choose Edit > Diagnostics >  
802.1ab > LLDP.  
The LLDP dialog box appears with the Globals tab displayed.  
2
Click the Organizational Defined Info tab.  
The Organizational Defined Info tab appears.  
Figure 109  
Organizational Defined Info tab  
The following table describes the Organizational Defined Info tab  
fields.  
Table 137  
Organizational Defined Info tab fields  
Field  
Description  
TimeMark  
LocalPortNum  
The TimeFilter for this entry.  
Identifies the local port on which the remote  
system information is received.  
Index  
An arbitrary local integer value used  
by this agent to identify a particular  
MSAP. An agent is encouraged to assign  
monotonically increasing index values to  
new entries, starting with one, after each  
reboot.  
OrgDefInfoOUI  
The Organizationally Unique Identifier  
(OUI), as defined in IEEE 802-2001, is a 24  
bit (three octets) globally unique assigned  
number referenced by various standards,  
of the information received from the remote  
system.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring LLDP using Device Manager 301  
Field  
Description  
OrgDefInfoSubtype  
The integer value used to identify  
the subtype of the organizationally  
defined information received from the  
remote system. The subtype value is  
required to identify different instances  
of organizationally defined information  
that cannot be retrieved without a unique  
identifier that indicates the particular type  
of information contained in the information  
string.  
OrgDefInfoIndex  
This object represents an arbitrary local  
integer value used by this agent to identify  
a particular unrecognized organizationally  
defined information instance, unique  
only for the OrgDefInfoOUI and  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoSubtype of the same  
remote system. An agent is encouraged  
to assign monotonically increasing index  
values to new entries, starting with one,  
after each reboot. It is unlikely that the  
lldpRemOrgDefInfoIndex wraps between  
reboots.  
OrdDefInfo  
The string value used to identify the  
organizationally defined information of the  
remote system. The encoding for this  
object is the same as that defined for  
SnmpAdminString TC.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
302 Configuring the switch using Device Manager  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
303  
Configuring ports using Device  
Manager  
This chapter describes how to use Device Manager to configure ports on an  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
The windows displayed when you configure a single port differ from the  
ones displayed when you configure multiple ports. However, the options  
are similar.  
This section covers:  
Viewing and editing a single port configuration  
To view or edit the configuration of a single port, use the following procedure:  
Do one of the following:  
Double-click on a single port.  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.  
From the toolbar, click Edit.  
ATTENTION  
When you edit a single port, tabs that are not applicable are not available for  
you to select.  
When you edit multiple ports, some tabs are not available, and some tabs are  
available even though the options are not applicable. When the option does not  
apply for a given port, NoSuchObject is displayed.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
304 Configuring ports using Device Manager  
The following sections provide a description of the Edit Port dialog box, and  
details about the fields in the Interface tab:  
Interface tab for a single port  
The Interface tab shows the basic configuration and status of a single port.  
To view the Interface tab, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the port you want to edit.  
Do one of the following:  
Double-click on the selected port.  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.  
From the toolbar, click Edit.  
The Port dialog box for a single port appears with the Interface  
tab displayed.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Viewing and editing a single port configuration 305  
Figure 110  
Port dialog box Interface tab  
ATTENTION  
10/100BASE-TX ports may not autonegotiate correctly with older  
10/100BASE-TX equipment. In some cases, the older devices can  
be upgraded with new firmware or driver revisions. If an upgrade does  
not allow autonegotiation to correctly identify the link speed and duplex  
settings, you can manually configure the settings for the link in question.  
—End—  
Interface tab fields  
Interface tab fields for a single port.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
306 Configuring ports using Device Manager  
Table 138  
Interface tab fields for a single port  
Field  
Description  
Index  
A unique value assigned to each interface. The value ranges  
between 1 and 512.  
Name  
Descr  
Type  
Mtu  
Specifies a name for the port.  
The description of the selected port.  
The media type of this interface.  
The size of the largest packet, in octets, that can be sent or received  
on the interface.  
PhysAddress  
AdminStatus  
The MAC address assigned to a particular interface.  
The current administrative state of the device, which can be one of  
the following:  
up  
down  
When a managed system is initialized, all interfaces start with  
AdminStatus in the up state. AdminStatus changes to the down state  
(or remains in the up state) as a result of either management action  
or the configuration information available to the managed system.  
OperStatus  
The current operational state of the interface, which can be one of  
the following:  
up  
down  
testing  
If AdminStatus is up, then OperStatus should be up if the interface is  
ready to transmit and receive network traffic. If AdminStatus is down,  
then OperStatus should be down. It should remain in the down state  
if and only if there is a fault that prevents it from going to the up state.  
The testing state indicates that no operational packets can be passed.  
LastChange  
LinkTrap  
The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current  
operational state. If the current state was entered prior to the last  
reinitialization of the local network management subsystem, the value  
is zero.  
Specifies whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for  
this interface.  
AutoNegotiate  
AdminDuplex  
Indicates whether this port is enabled for autonegotiation or not.  
The current administrative duplex mode of the port (half or full).  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Viewing and editing multiple port configurations 307  
Field  
Description  
OperDuplex  
The current mode of the port (half duplex or full duplex).  
Set the port’s speed.  
AdminSpeed  
OperSpeed  
The current operating speed of the port.  
AutoNegotiationCapability  
Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a switch can  
support on a port, and that may be advertised by the port using  
auto-negotiation.  
AutoNegotiation  
Advertisments  
Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be advertised during  
link negotiation.  
MltId  
The MultiLink Trunk to which the port is assigned (if any).  
IsPortShared  
Specifies whether a port is shared. Multiple ports that are logically  
represented as a single port are shared. Only one shared port may  
be active at a time.  
PortActiveComponent  
Specifies the physical port components that are active for a shared  
port.  
Viewing and editing multiple port configurations  
To view or edit the configurations of multiple ports:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the ports you want to edit.  
Press Ctrl+left click the ports you want to view or configure. A  
yellow outline appears around the selected ports.  
Do one of the following:  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.  
From the toolbar, click Edit.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
308 Configuring ports using Device Manager  
ATTENTION  
When you edit multiple ports, some tabs are not available, and some tabs  
are available even though the options are not applicable. When the option  
does not apply for a given port, NoSuchObject is displayed.  
—End—  
Interface tab for multiple ports  
The Interface tab shows the basic configuration and status of the selected  
ports.  
To view or edit the Interface tab for multiple ports, use the following  
procedure:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select the ports that you want to edit.  
Press Ctrl+left click the ports that you want to configure. A yellow  
outline appears around the selected ports.  
Do one of the following:  
From the shortcut menu, choose Edit.  
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Port.  
The Interface tab shows port interface statistics.  
Figure 111  
Interface tab for multiple ports  
—End—  
Interface tab fields for multiple ports.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Viewing and editing multiple port configurations 309  
Table 139  
Interface tab fields for multiple ports  
Field  
Description  
Index  
A unique value assigned to each interface. The value  
ranges between 1 and 512.  
Port  
Port Id in unit and port format.  
Name  
Descr  
Type  
Mtu  
Lets you enter a character string to name the port  
Type of switch and number of ports.  
Media type for this interface.  
Size of the largest packet, in octets, that can be sent or  
received on the interface.  
PhysAddress  
AdminStatus  
MAC address assigned to a particular interface.  
Current administrative state of the device, which can be  
one of the following:  
up  
down  
When a managed system is initialized, all interfaces start  
with AdminStatus in the up state. AdminStatus changes to  
the down state (or remains in the up state) as a result of  
either management action or the configuration information  
available to the managed system.  
OperStatus  
Current operational state of the interface, which can be  
one of the following:  
up  
down  
testing  
If AdminStatus is up, then OperStatus should be up if the  
interface is ready to transmit and receive network traffic. If  
AdminStatus is down, then OperStatus should be down.  
It should remain in the down state if and only if there is a  
fault that prevents it from going to the up state. The testing  
state indicates that no operational packets can be passed.  
LastChange  
LinkTrap  
Value of the time the interface entered its current  
operational state. If the current state was entered prior to  
the last reinitialization of the local network management  
subsystem, the value is zero.  
Specifies whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be  
generated for this interface  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
310 Configuring ports using Device Manager  
Field  
Description  
Auto  
Negotiate  
Indicates whether the port is enabled (checked) for  
autonegotiation or not.  
AdminDuplex  
The current administrative duplex mode of the port (half  
or full).  
OperDuplex  
AdminSpeed  
OperSpeed  
Indicate current duplex value of the port.  
Set the speed of a port: none, mbps10, and mbps100.  
The current operating speed of the port.  
AutoNegotiation  
Capability  
Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a  
switch can support on a port, and that may be advertised  
by the port using auto-negotiation  
AutoNegotiation  
Advertisments  
Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be  
advertised during link negotiation.  
MltId  
The MultiLink Trunk to which the port is assigned (if any).  
IsPortShared  
Specifies whether a port is shared. Multiple ports that are  
logically represented as a single port are shared. Only  
one shared port may be active at a time.  
PortActive  
Component  
Specifies the physical port components that are active  
for a shared port.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
311  
Administering the switch using  
web-based management  
The administrative options available to you are:  
Viewing system information  
You can view an image of the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series,  
information about the host device and, if provided, the contact person  
or manager for the switch. The System Information page is also the  
web-based management interface home page.  
To view system information, use the following procedure:  
From the main menu, choose Administration > System Information.  
The System Information page appears.  
ATTENTION  
You may create or modify existing system information parameters using the  
System page.For more information on configuring system information, see  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
312 Administering the switch using web-based management  
Figure 112  
System Information page  
on the System Information page.  
Table 140  
System Information page items  
Item  
Description  
sysDescription  
The default description of the Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500 Series.  
sysUpTime  
sysName  
The elapsed time since the last network management  
portion of the system was last re-initialized.  
The name created by the network administrator to  
identify the switch, for example, Finance Group.  
sysLocation  
sysContact  
The location name created by the network administrator  
to identify the switch location, for example, first floor.  
The name, email, address, and telephone number of the  
person to contact about switch operation.  
Quick Start  
The Quick Start feature lets the administrator of the Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500 Series make the initial setup by consolidating multiple setup pages  
into a single page. The Quick Start screen allows the administrator to  
configure the following information:  
IP address  
Subnet mask  
Default gateway  
SNMP Read community  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Quick Start 313  
SNMP Write community  
SNMP Trap IP addresses and communities (up to four)  
New default VLAN  
During the initial setup mode, all ports are assigned to the new default VLAN.  
A port-based Quick Start VLAN is created if the new default VLAN does not  
exist. All ports are removed from the current default VLAN and assigned to  
the Quick Start VLAN. The PVIDs for all ports are changed to the Quick Start  
VLAN. The Quick Start VLAN is also designated as the management VLAN.  
To configure the initial settings using the Quick Start feature:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, select Administration > Quick Start.  
The Quick Start page is displayed.  
Figure 113  
Quick Start page  
2
Click on the Submit button after making the required settings.  
The following table describes the items on the Quick Start page.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
314 Administering the switch using web-based management  
Table 141  
Items on the Quick Start page  
Item  
Description  
Section  
IP  
In-Band Switch  
IP Address  
Specify a new IP address for the  
switch.  
In-Band Subnet Enter a new subnet mask.  
Mask  
Default  
Gateway  
Specify an IP address for the  
default gateway.  
Community  
String  
Read-Only  
Community  
String  
Specify a character string to  
identify the community string for the  
SNMPv1 Read-Only community,  
for example, public or private.  
Re-enter character string to verify.  
The default value is public.  
Read-Write  
Community  
String  
Specify a character string to  
identify the community string for the  
SNMPv1 Read-Write community,  
for example, public or private.  
Re-enter character string to verify.  
The default value is private.  
Trap Receiver  
Index  
Select the number of the Trap  
Receiver to create or modify.  
IP address  
Specify the network address for the  
SNMP Manager that is to receive  
the specified Trap.  
Community  
Type the Community String for the  
specified Trap Receiver. Re-enter  
Community String to verify.  
VLAN  
Quick Start  
VLAN  
Specify the IP of the port-based  
Quick Start VLAN.  
—End—  
Configuring system security  
For information on configuring system security, please see Nortel Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series Security — Configuration and Management  
(NN47215-505).  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Rebooting the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series 315  
Rebooting the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
You can reboot a unit in stack or an entire stack without erasing any  
configured switch parameters. While rebooting, the switch initiates a  
self-test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests. The LEDs  
display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress.  
To reboot the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series without making changes  
(since your last Submit request):  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset.  
Figure 114  
Reset page  
The reset warning message displays.  
Figure 115  
Reset page message  
2
Click OK.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
316 Administering the switch using web-based management  
Changing the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to system  
defaults  
You can replace all configured switch parameters with the factory default  
values.  
CAUTION  
If you choose change to default settings, all configured settings  
are replaced with factory default settings when you click Submit.  
For more information about factory default settings, see Appendix  
During the process of changing to default settings, the switch initiates a  
self-test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests. The LEDs  
display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress.  
To change the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series to system defaults:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset to Default.  
The reset to default warning message displays.  
Figure 116  
Reset to Default page message  
—End—  
Logging out of the management interface  
To log out of the Web-based management interface, use the following  
procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Administration > Logout.  
A logout message displays.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Logging out of the management interface 317  
Figure 117  
Logout message  
2
Do one of the following:  
Click OK to log out.  
Click Cancel to return to the web-based management interface  
home page.  
ATTENTION  
If you have not configured system password security, a reset returns you  
to the home page. If you have configured system password security, a  
reset returns you to a log on page (for details on configuring management  
passwords, see Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series Security —  
Configuration and Management (NN47215-505)).  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
318 Administering the switch using web-based management  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
319  
Configuring the switch using web-based  
management  
The switch configuration options available to you are:  
Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings  
You can configure the BootP mode settings, create and modify the In-band  
switch IP addresses and In-band subnet mask parameters, and configure  
the IP address of your default gateway.  
ATTENTION  
Settings take effect immediately when you click Submit.  
To configure BootP, IP, and gateway settings, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > IP.  
The IP page appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
320 Configuring the switch using web-based management  
Figure 118  
IP page  
The following table describes the items on the IP page.  
Table 142  
IP page items  
Section  
Item  
Range  
Description  
Boot Mode  
Setting  
BootP  
Request  
Mode  
BootP or Default IP (default)  
Choose this mode to inform the  
switch to send a BootP request  
when the switch IP address  
stored in nonvolatile memory is  
the factory default value. If the  
stored IP address differs from  
the factory default value, the  
switch uses the stored network  
parameters. If the switch cannot  
find a BootP server, it tries five  
more times to find one and then  
defaults to the factory settings  
BootP Always  
Choose this mode to inform  
the switch to ignore any stored  
network parameters and send  
a BootP request, each time it  
boots. If the BootP request  
fails, the switch boots with the  
factory default IP configuration.  
This setting disables remote  
management if no BootP server  
is set up for the switch, but lets  
the switch boot normally.  
BootP Disabled  
Choose this mode to inform the  
switch to use the IP configuration  
parameters stored in nonvolatile  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring BootP, IP, and gateway settings 321  
Section  
Item  
Range  
Description  
memory, each time the switch  
boots. If a BootP configuration  
is in progress when you issue  
this command, the BootP  
configuration stops.  
BootP or Last Address  
Choose this mode to inform  
the switch at each startup,  
to obtain its IP configuration  
using BootP. If the BootP  
request fails, the switch uses  
the network parameters stored  
in its nonvolatile memory.  
ATTENTION  
Valid parameters obtained in  
using BootP always replace  
current information stored in  
the nonvolatile memory.  
ATTENTION  
Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests, the BootP  
process times out if a reply is not received within 7 minutes  
(approximately). When the process times out, the BootP request  
mode automatically changes to BootP Disabled mode. To restart  
the BootP process, change the BootP request mode to any of  
the three following modes: BootP or Default IP, BootP Always,  
or to BootP or Last Address.  
IP Setting  
In-Band  
Stack IP  
Address  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
Type a new stack IP address in  
the appropriate format.  
In-Band  
Switch IP  
Type a new switch IP address  
in the appropriate format.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
322 Configuring the switch using web-based management  
Section  
Item  
Range  
Description  
Address  
ATTENTION  
When the IP address is  
entered in the In-Band  
IP Address field, and the  
In-Band Subnet Mask field  
value is not present, the  
software provides an in-use  
default value for the In-Band  
Subnet Mask field that is  
based on the class of the  
IP address entered in the  
In-Band IP Address field.  
In-Band  
Subnet Mast  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
Type a new subnet mask in the  
appropriate format.  
Network routers use the subnet  
mask to determine the network or  
subnet address portion of a host’s  
IP address. The bits in the IP  
address that contain the network  
address (including the subnet)  
are set to 1 in the address mask,  
and the bits that contain the host  
identifier are set to 0.  
Gateway  
Setting  
Default  
Gateway  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
Type an IP address for the default  
gateway in the appropriate  
format.  
2
3
Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list.  
Click Submit.  
—End—  
Modifying system settings  
You can create or modify the system name, system location, and network  
manager contact information.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modifying system settings 323  
ATTENTION  
The configurable parameters on the System page are displayed in a read only  
format on the System Information home page.  
To configure system settings, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > System.  
The System page appears.  
Figure 119  
System page  
the System page.  
Table 143  
System page items  
Item  
Range  
Description  
System  
Description  
The factory set description of the hardware and software  
versions.  
System Object ID  
The character string that the vendor created to uniquely identify  
this device.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
324 Configuring the switch using web-based management  
Item  
Range  
Description  
System Up Time  
The elapsed time since the last network management portion  
of the system was last re-initialized.  
ATTENTION  
This field is updated only when the screen is redisplayed.  
1..255  
1..255  
1..255  
System Name  
Type a character string to create a name to identify the switch,  
for example Finance Group.  
System Location  
System Contact  
Type a character string to create a name for the switch location,  
for example, First Floor.  
Type a character string to create the contact information for the  
network manager or the selected person to contact regarding  
switch operation, for example, mcarlson@company.com  
ATTENTION  
To operate correctly with the Web interface, the system  
contact should be an e-mail address.  
2
3
Type information in the text boxes.  
Click Submit.  
—End—  
Configuring switch port status  
You can use the Port Management page to configure a specific switch port  
or all switch ports to autonegotiate for the highest available speed of the  
connected station or you can set the speed for selected switch ports.  
ATTENTION  
Autonegotiation is not supported on 1000 Mb/s fiber optic ports.  
You can disable switch ports that are trunk members, if you choose to  
disable them one by one. If you choose to disable all ports of the unit or  
stack, the changes cannot have effect on the ports belonging to MLTs.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring switch port status 325  
ATTENTION  
The Autonegotiation, Speed, and the Duplex fields are independent of MultiLink  
Trunking, VLANs, and the STP.  
To configure switch port properties, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > Port Management.  
The Port Management page appears.  
Figure 120  
Port Management page  
The following table describes the items on the Port Management  
page.  
Table 144  
Port Management page items  
Item  
Range  
Description  
Port  
The switch port number of the corresponding row. The  
values that you set in each switch row affect all switch ports.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
326 Configuring the switch using web-based management  
Item  
Range  
Description  
Alias  
Displays the name, or alias, you assigned the port. To  
assign or change the name, enter up to 26 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Trunk  
The trunk group that the switch port belongs to as specified  
in the Trunk Member fields on the MultiLink Trunk page.  
Status  
(1) Enabled  
(2) Disabled  
Choose to enable or disable the port. You can also use this  
field to control access to any switch port.  
The default setting is Enabled.  
Link  
The current link state of the corresponding port as follows:  
Up: The port is connected and operational  
Down: The port is not connected or is not operational.  
Link Trap  
(1) On  
(2) Off  
Choose to control whether link up/down traps are sent to  
the configured trap receiver from the switch.  
The default setting is On.  
Autonegotiation  
(1) Enabled  
(2) Disabled  
Choose to enable or disable the autonegotiation feature.  
Choosing to enable autonegotiation sets the  
corresponding port speed to match the best service  
provided by the connected station, up to 100Mb/s in  
full-duplex mode.  
ATTENTION  
Autonegotiation also enables auto sensing on 10/100  
ports.  
The default setting is Enabled.  
Speed / Duplex  
(1) 10Mbs / Half  
(2) 10Mbs / Full  
(3) 100Mbs / Half  
(4) 100Mbs / Full  
(5) 1000Mbs / Full  
Lets you manually configure any port to support a specific  
Ethernet speed and duplex setting.  
The default setting is 10 Mbs/Half when autonegotiation is  
disabled and 1000 Mb/s full-duplex for gigabit ports only.  
2
3
In the port row of your choice, select from the lists.  
Click Submit.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring high speed flow control 327  
—End—  
Configuring high speed flow control  
You can view the High Speed Flow Control parameters for Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500 Series in this page.  
To configure high speed flow control, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > High Speed Flow  
Control.  
The High Speed Flow Control page appears.  
Figure 121  
High Speed Flow Control page  
The following table describes the items on the High Speed Flow  
Control page.  
Table 145  
High Speed Flow Control page items  
Item  
Range  
Description  
Port  
The switch port number of the corresponding row.  
Autonegotiation  
(1) Enabled  
(2) Disabled  
Displays if the autonegotiation feature is enabled or  
disabled.  
When enabled, the port advertises support only for  
1000Mb/s operation in full-duplex mode.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
328 Configuring the switch using web-based management  
Item  
Range  
Description  
Speed/Duplex  
Flow Control  
100MBS/Full  
XXXXXX  
(1) Enabled  
Displays current settings of flow control.  
(2) Symmetric  
(3) Asymmetric  
—End—  
Downloading switch images  
You can download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series software image  
to nonvolatile flash memory. To download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
Series software image, a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol  
(TFTP) server must be present in your network, and the Ethernet Routing  
Switch 2500 Series must have an IP address. To learn how to configure the  
switch IP address, see "ip address command" (page 178).  
CAUTION  
Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download  
process. A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image.  
To download a switch image, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > Software Download.  
The Software Download page appears.  
Figure 122  
Software Download page  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Downloading switch images 329  
The following table describes the fields on the Software Download  
page.  
Table 146  
Software Download page fields  
Fields  
Range  
Description  
Current Running Version  
The version of the current running  
software.  
Local Store Version  
The local version of the software in the  
flash memory.  
1..30  
Software Image Filename  
Diagnostics Filename  
Type the software image file name.  
Type the diagnostics file name.  
1..30  
TFTP Server IP Address  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
Type the IP address of your TFTP load  
host.  
Download Option  
No  
Choose the software download option.  
Software Image  
Diagnostics  
Software Image If Newer  
Download without reset  
2
3
Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list.  
Click Submit.  
The software download process automatically completes without  
user intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory  
and replaces it with a new software image. Take care not to interrupt  
the download process until after it runs to completion (the process  
can take up to ten minutes, depending on network conditions).  
Unless you choose the Download without reset option, the switch  
automatically resets after the download process is complete. The  
new software image then initiates a self-test.  
During the download process, the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500  
Series is not operational. You can monitor the progress of the  
download process by observing the LED indications.  
—End—  
The following table describes the LED indications displayed during the  
software download process.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
330 Configuring the switch using web-based management  
ATTENTION  
The LED indications described in the following table apply to a 2526T switch  
model. Although a 2550T switch provides similar LED indications, the LED  
indication sequence is associated within the 48-port range.  
Table 147  
LED Indications during the software download process  
Phase  
Description  
LED Indications  
1
The switch downloads the new  
software image and programs it.  
100 Mb/s port status LEDs (ports 18 to 24  
only): The LEDs begin to turn on in succession  
on each ASIC as follows: ASIC 1 from port 1 to  
port 12 and return, ASIC 2 from with port 24 to  
port 13 and return, ASIC 3 from port 25 to port  
36 and return, ASIC 4 from port 48 to port 37  
and return.  
2
The switch resets automatically.  
After the reset completes, the new software  
image initiates the switch self-test, which  
comprises various diagnostic routines and  
subtests.  
ATTENTION  
The LEDs display various patterns to indicate  
that the subtests are in progress.  
Downloading ASCII configuration files  
The ASCII Config Download feature lets you upload an ASCII configuration  
file from a personal computer to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
In the current implementation, you require a TFTP server to upload an ASCII  
configuration file to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series. But with this  
feature the requirement of a TFTP server is eliminated. This feature lets you  
upload an ASCII configuration file using the HTTP protocol.  
To download the ASCII configuration file to the Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500 Series.  
Step Action  
1
2
From the main menu, choose Configuration > Ascii Config  
Download.  
The Ascii Configuration File Download page appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server 331  
Figure 123  
Ascii Configuration file download page  
—End—  
The following table describes the items displayed on the ASCII Configuration  
File Download page.  
Table 148  
Ascii Configuration file download page items  
Item  
Description  
Ascii Configuration File  
Lets you select the ASCII config file located on a  
personal computer.  
Last Manual Configuration Displays the status of the download.  
Status  
Submit  
Click on this button to upload the ASCII configuration  
file from the personal computer to the Ethernet  
Routing Switch 2500 Series.  
Storing and retrieving a switch configuration file from a TFTP server  
You can store switch configuration parameters on a Trivial File Transfer  
Protocol (TFTP) server. You can retrieve the configuration parameters and  
use the retrieved parameters to automatically configure a replacement  
switch.  
To store a switch configuration, you must set up the file on your TFTP server  
and set the filename read/write permission to enabled.  
To download the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series configuration file, a  
properly configured TFTP server must be present in your network, and the  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series must have an IP address.  
To learn how to configure the switch IP address, see "Configuring BootP, IP,  
To store or retrieve a switch configuration file, use the following procedure:  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
332 Configuring the switch using web-based management  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > Configuration File.  
The Configuration File page appears.  
Figure 124  
Configuration File  
The following table describes the Configuration File Setting items  
on the Configuration File page.  
Table 149  
Configuration File Setting items  
Item  
Range  
Description  
1..32  
Configuration Image  
Filename  
Type the configuration file name.  
TFTP Server IP  
Address  
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX  
Type the IP address of the TFTP load host.  
Copy Configuration  
Image to Target  
(1) Yes  
(2) No  
Choose whether or not to copy the configuration  
image to the server.  
Retrieve Configuration (1) Yes  
Image from Target (2) No  
Choose whether or not to retrieve the  
configuration image from a server. If you choose  
Yes, the download process begins immediately  
and, when completed, causes the switch to reset  
with the new configuration parameters.  
2
Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enabling and disabling autosave 333  
3
Click Submit.  
—End—  
Requirements for storing and retrieving configuration parameters on a  
TFTP server  
The following requirements apply when storing and retrieving configuration  
parameters on a TFTP server:  
The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone  
switch configuration parameters to other standalone switches.  
A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used  
to configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware  
revision and model type as the donor standalone switch.  
The configuration file also duplicates any settings that exist for any GBIC  
that is installed in the donor switch.  
If you use the configuration file to configure another switch that has  
the same GBIC model installed, the configuration file settings can also  
apply to and override the existing GBIC settings.  
333) describes the parameters that are not saved to the configuration file.  
Table 150  
Parameters not saved to the configuration file  
These parameters are not saved:  
In-Band Switch IP Address  
In-Band Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
Configuration Image Filename  
TFTP Server IP Address  
Enabling and disabling autosave  
The Configuration File page also lets you enable and disable the autosave  
feature on the switch.  
To enable or disable autosave, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > Configuration File.  
The Configuration File page appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
334 Configuring the switch using web-based management  
2
3
Under Autosave Configuration, choose Enabled or Disabled from  
the drop-down list.  
Click Submit.  
—End—  
Configuring port communication speed  
You can view the current console/communication port settings and configure  
the Console port baud rate to match the baud rate of the console terminal.  
To view current console/communication port settings and configure Console  
port speed, use the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Configuration > Console/Comm  
Port.  
The Console/Communication Port page appears.  
Figure 125  
Console/Communication Port page  
The following table describes the items on the Console/Commu-  
nication Port page.  
Table 151  
Console/Communication Port page items  
Item  
Range  
Description  
Comm Port Data Bits  
The current console communication port data bit  
setting.  
Comm Port Parity  
The current console communication port parity setting.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Rate Limiting 335  
Item  
Range  
Description  
Comm Port Stop Bits  
The current console communication port stop bit  
setting.  
2400  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400  
Console port Speed  
Choose the Console port speed baud rate.  
ATTENTION  
The default setting is 9600.  
CAUTION  
If you choose a baud rate that does  
not match your console terminal  
baud rate, you lose communication  
with the configuration interface  
when you click Submit.  
2
3
Select from the list.  
Click Submit.  
—End—  
Configuring Rate Limiting  
Broadcast Rate Limiting is a box-oriented feature which lets you configure  
threshold limits for either broadcast or multicast packets ingressing on a  
port for a given time interval (in packets/second). If the configured threshold  
exceeds on a port, the switch drops extra packets received. No SNMP trap  
or syslog is generated in case of congestion.  
Configuring Rate Limiting  
To configure Rate Limiting using the web-based management system, use  
the following procedure:  
Step Action  
1
From the main menu, choose Application > Rate Limiting.  
The Rate Limiting page appears.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
336 Configuring the switch using web-based management  
Figure 126  
Rate Limiting page  
The following table describes the items on the Rate Limiting page.  
Table 152  
Rate Limiting page items  
Section  
Description  
Port  
The port number that corresponds to the selected  
switch or stack.  
Packet Type  
Limit  
Select the type of packet: Multicast, Broadcast, or  
Both.  
Configure the threshold limit for the selected type of  
packet.  
2
3
On the Rate Limiting page, type information in the text boxes, or  
select from a list.  
Click Submit.  
—End—  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
337  
Troubleshooting  
This chapter describes how to isolate and diagnose problems with your  
Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series and covers the following topics:  
— Normal power-up sequence  
— Port connection problems  
Interpreting the LEDs  
For information on interpreting the LEDs for the Ethernet Routing Switch  
2500 Series, see "LED display panel" (page 27).  
Diagnosing and correcting problems  
Before you execute the problem-solving steps described in this section,  
cycle the power to the Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series (disconnect and  
then reconnect the AC power cord); then verify that the switch follows the  
normal power-up sequence.  
WARNING  
To avoid injury from hazardous electrical current, do not remove  
the top cover of the device. There are no user-serviceable  
components inside.  
WARNING  
Vorsicht  
Um Verletzungsgefahr durch einen elektrischen Stromschlag  
auszuschließen, nehmen Sie niemals die obere Abdeckung vom  
Gerät ab. Im Geräteinnern befinden sich keine Komponenten, die  
vom Benutzer gewartet werden können.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
338 Troubleshooting  
WARNING  
Avertissement  
Pour éviter tout risque d’électrocution, ne jamais retirer le capot  
de l’appareil. Cet appareil ne contient aucune pièce accessible  
par l’utilisateur.  
WARNING  
Advertencia  
A fin de evitar daños personales por corrientes eléctricas  
peligrosas, no desmonte nunca la cubierta superior de este  
dispositivo. Los componentes internos no son reparables por el  
usuario.  
WARNING  
Avvertenza  
Per evitare lesioni fisiche dovute a scariche pericolose di corrente,  
non rimuovere mai il coperchio superiore del dispositivo. I  
componenti interni non possono essere manipolati dall’utente.  
Normal power-up sequence  
In a normal power-up sequence, the LEDs appear as follows:  
1. After power is applied to the switch, the Pwr (Power) LED turns on within  
5 seconds.  
2. The switch initiates a self-test, during which the port LEDs display  
various patterns to indicate the progress of the self-test.  
3. After the self-test, the remaining port LEDs indicate their operational  
status, as described in the following table.  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Diagnosing and correcting problems 339  
Table 153  
Corrective actions  
Symptom  
Probable cause  
Corrective action  
All LEDs are off.  
The switch is not  
receiving AC power.  
Verify that the AC power cord is fastened  
securely at both ends and that power is available  
at the AC power outlet.  
The fans are not  
Verify that there is sufficient space for  
adequate airflow on both sides of the switch.  
operating or the airflow  
is blocked, causing the  
unit to overheat.  
ATTENTION  
Operating temperature for the switch must  
not exceed 40 C (104 F). Do not place the  
switch in areas where it can be exposed to  
direct sunlight or near warm air exhausts or  
heaters.  
The Activity LED for a  
The switch is  
connected port is off or experiencing a port  
does not blink (and you connection problem.  
have reason to believe  
that traffic is present).  
partner is not  
The switch’s link  
autonegotiating  
properly.  
Port connection problems  
You can usually trace port connection problems to either a poor cable  
connection or an improper connection of the port cables at either end of  
the link. To remedy these types of problems, make sure that the cable  
connections are secure and that the cables connect to the correct ports at  
both ends of the link.  
Port connection problems are also traceable to the autonegotiation mode  
or the port interface.  
Autonegotiation modes  
Port connection problems can occur when a port (or station) is connected  
to another port (or station) that is not operating in a compatible mode (for  
example, connecting a full-duplex port on one station to a half-duplex port  
on another station).  
Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 2500 Series  
Overview — System Configuration  
NN47215-500 (323162-B) 02.02 Standard  
4.1 19 November 2007  
Copyright © 2007, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     

Miele Vacuum Cleaner S 5001 User Manual
MTD Yard Vacuum 242 675 000 User Manual
Nextar Digital Photo Frame N7 107 User Manual
NHT Speaker S 20 User Manual
Nortel Networks IP Phone NN40050 107 User Manual
Omnimount TV Video Accessories MORELLO50 User Manual
Onkyo Stereo Receiver HT RC330 User Manual
Panasonic Laptop CF 53ASUZX1M User Manual
Paradyne Network Card UIM 10 100 User Manual
Parrot GPS Receiver SPV C600 User Manual